989400G6 Epsilon Technical Manual

EPS 45-80 High-Voltage Generator
Technical Manual
MANUAL P/N 9894.00.G6

Copyright application © 2006, 2007, 2008 by emd technologies Inc. All rights reserved.
emd technologies and the emd technologies logo are trademarks of emd technologies Inc.,
registered in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system
without the written permission of emd technologies Inc., 400 du Parc, Saint-Eustache (Quebec),
Canada, J7R 0A1.
IMPROVEMENTS
emd technologies reserves the right to make changes and improvements to its products and assumes
no obligation to incorporate any changes into units previously sold or shipped.
Head Office European Authorized Representative
emd technologies Biocordis France S.A.A

400 du Parc, 1, Route Nationale 448 – B.P. 27
Saint-Eustache (Quebec) F91450 Etiolles
Canada, J7R 0A1 France
Phone : +1-450.491.2100 Phone : +33-(0)160.756.909
Fax : +1-450.491.4138 Fax : +33-(0)160.756.676
www.emd-technologies.com
July 31/2008
ii Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

Introduction to Epsilon Technical Manual
INTRODUCTION TO EPSILON TECHNICAL MANUAL
A. GENERAL
A.1 Intended Purpose

Epsilon EPS 45-80 High-Voltage generator is a medical device used with complementary X-ray
apparatus in order to emit ionizing radiation intended for diagnostic interventional radiology. It is
designed to work in a safe environment for the patient and the operator.
The generator and operational instructions are to be used by qualified persons having been trained
in radiation protection. The generator must be operated in conformance with the manufacturer's
instructions and within local government regulations.
A.2 Application Note

This manual applies to the Epsilon EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator, RAD & RF
configurations, 30 through 100 kW.
A.2 Documentation
The present manual describes the installation, start-up & setup instructions and maintenance
procedures for the generator. It also gives the performance and technical specifications of the
described product and provides the installer with all of the safety procedures necessary for a safe
installation and maintenance.
For a complete user's guidance description, refer to the operator's manual.
Operator’s ° Operator’s Manual P/N 9895.00 : RAD & Fluoro Configuration (English)
Manuals ° Operator’s Manual P/N 9895.01 : RAD & Fluoro Configuration (OEM)
° Operator’s Manual P/N 9895.02 : Biplane Configuration
No
tes ° Operator’s Manual P/N 9895.03 : RAD & Fluoro Configuration (Chinese)
° Operator’s Manual P/N 9895.04 : RAD & Fluoro Configuration (French)
° Operator’s Manual P/N 9895.05 : Cardiac Configuration (English)
° Operator’s Manual P/N 9895.11 : Cardiac Configuration (English, CV Console)
Electronic Documentation: Refer also to the electronic documentation CD for

technical supplements dedicated to optional configurations.
A.3 Contraindications
No contraindications are known for the products described in this manual.
Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 iii

A.4 Definitions
ABS : Automatic Brightness Stabilization, in Fluoro mode. Mode of operation in which the
factors of the Fluoroscopic beam is automatically adjusted to obtain an optimal image
brightness.
AEC : Automatic Exposure Control, in RAD mode

In an X-ray Generator, mode of operation in which one or more loading factors are controlled automatically in
order to obtain at a preselected location a desired quantity of radiation (1).
kV : Peak voltage applied between the anode and cathode of an x-ray tube, in thousands of
volts.
kW : Describes the product of both kV and mA output at the generator or loaded at the
terminals of the X-ray tube.
mA : Average x-ray tube current, in milliamperes, during the irradiation time. The operator
console can also display the peak mA rather than the average mA, during the optional
Pulsed Fluoro, if the user does want so.
mAs : X-ray tube current by time product (mA x Time), in milliamperes-seconds
Operator: Person handling the generator.
Service representative: Person installing, maintaining and repairing the generator.
SPD : Source to Patient Distance
Time : Irradiation time, in milliseconds (ms) or seconds (s). Irradiation time represents the time
interval between the instant that the tube potential has risen for the first time to a value
of 80% and the instant at which it finally drops below the same value.
User : Authority responsible for the use and maintenance of the generator.
WKS : Workstation (or image receptor). Transducer device that converts the X-ray beam energy
across the patient into visible images.
(1) Medical radiology – Terminology, IEC Standard Publication 788, First Edition, 1984.
iv Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

B. SAFETY PROCEDURES
Disregard of the procedures given below may cause serious or fatal

bodily injury.
B.1 Electrical Safety

All of the movable assemblies and parts of this equipment should be operated with care and
routinely inspected in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations contained in the
present manual.
Only properly trained and qualified personnel should be permitted access to any internal parts. Live
electrical terminals are deadly; be sure line disconnect switches are opened and other appropriate
precautions are taken before attaching accessories.
Do not remove the flexible H. T. cables from the X-ray tube housing or Anode or Cathode
assemblies H.T. connector until the electrical mains have been disconnected for at least 1 minute.
B.2 Radiation Safety

X-rays are dangerous to both operator and others in the vicinity unless established safe exposure
procedures are strictly observed.
The useful and scattered beams can produce serious or fatal bodily injuries to any persons in the
surrounding area if used by an unskilled operator. Adequate precautions must always be taken to
avoid exposure to the useful beam, as well as to leakage radiation from within the source housing or
to scattered radiation resulting from the passage of radiation through matter.
Those authorized to operate, participate in or supervise the operation of the equipment must be
thoroughly familiar and comply completely with the currently established safe exposure factors and
procedures described in publications. Failure to observe these warnings may cause serious or fatal
bodily injuries to the operator or those in the area.
B.3 Class l Equipment
According to the class of equipment, the Epsilon High-Voltage generator must be referenced to
an earth ground by a protective earth conductor. Failure to provide a separate earth ground can
result in electrical shock hazard causing injury or death.
Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 v

C. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
The Epsilon EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator complies with the IEC 60601-1-2 standard
(2nd version: 2001).
Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions

The EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Emission test Compliance Electromagnetic environment- guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator uses RF energy only
CISPR 11 for its internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and
are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
RF emissions Class A The EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator is suitable for use in all
CISPR 11 establishments other than domestic and those directly connected to
the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings
Harmonic emissions Not applicable
used for domestic purposes.
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/ Not applicable
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
Compliance to any EMC standard does not guarantee that a device will not interfere with or will not
be affected by the operation of another electrical medical equipment placed in the nearby
environment. Therefore, the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator is not designed to work in
close vicinity with other electrical equipment or in the presence of portable and mobile RF
communication equipment. Stacking and adjacent positioning of equipment should be avoided.
EMC Instructions
1. When stacking or adjacent positioning of equipment or accessories is unavoidable,
make sure that the performance of the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator
and of the stacked equipment is not adversely affected.
2. The performance of the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator can be affected
by the presence of portable and mobile RF communication equipment.
3. Do not operate the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator without all covers
and enclosure perfectly fitted onto the High-Voltage Power Supply.
vi Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity

environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic environment- guidance
test level level
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment
should be used no closer to any part of the EPS 45-
80 High-Voltage X-ray generator, including cables,
than the recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
d = [1,2] P
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz d = [1,2] P , 80 MHz to 800 MHz
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = [2,3] P , 800 MHz to 2,50 GHz
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths fixed RD transmitter, as determined

by an electromagnetic site survey, a should be less
than the compliance level in each frequency range.b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

marked with the following symbol:
Note 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land
mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with
accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment, due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should
be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator is used
exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator should be observed to
verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting
or relocating the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator.
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 vii

Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity

environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 Compliance level Electromagnetic
test level environment- guidance
Electrostatic ± 6 kV contact ± 6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete
discharge (ESD) or ceramic tile. If floors are
± 8 kV air ± 8 kV air covered with synthetic material;
IEC 61000-4-2 the relative humidity should be at
least 30%.
Electrical fast ± 2 kV for power supply ± 2 kV for power supply Mains power quality should be that
transient/burst lines lines of a typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-4 environment.
± 1 kV for input/output ± 1 kV for input/output
lines lines
Surge ± 1 kV differential mode ± 1 kV differential mode Mains power quality should be that
IEC 61000-4-5 of a typical commercial or hospital
± 2 kV common mode ± 2 kV common mode environment.
Voltage dips, short < 5% UT N/A Mains power quality should be that
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) for 0,5 of a typical commercial or hospital
voltage variations on cycle environment. If the user of the
power supply input 40% UT EPS 45-80 High Voltage X-ray
lines (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles generator requires continued
IEC 61000-4-11 70% UT operation during power mains
(30% dip in UT) for 25 interruptions, it is recommended
cycles that the EPS 45-80 High Voltage
< 5% UT X-ray generator be powered from
(>95% dip in UT) an uninterruptible power supply or
for 5 seconds a battery.
Power frequency (50/60 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields
Hz) magnetic field should be at levels characteristic of
IEC 61000-4-8 a typical location in a typical
commercial or hospital
environment.
UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
viii Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

Recommended separation distances between portable

and mobile RF communications equipment and EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator
The EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray generator is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in
which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-
ray generator can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between
portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage X-ray
generator as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)
power of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2,50 GHz
W d = [1,2] P d = [1,2] P d = [2,3] P
0,01 0,12 0,12 0,23
0,1 0,38 0,38 0,73
1 1,2 1,2 2,3
10 3,8 3,8 7,3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in
meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the
maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Cable Types Requirements

The following cable types are the minimum requirements to maintain compliance with the
electromagnetic compatibility
No cable shall exceed 100 ft (33 m) unless in situ tests are performed to validate EMC compliance.
1) EPS Console cable: Supplied with the product; shielded & multi-conductors type (P/N 10015.xxx)
2) All interconnection cables for low voltage I/O signals between generator and customer equipment:
• (Generic type) Jacket insulated over 100% foil shield with ground drain conductor, multi-conductors type,
typical 20 AWG stranded, voltage rated for the purpose.
3) X-ray tube rotor supply cable
• (Generic type) Jacket insulated over 100%, foil shield with ground drain conductor, multi-conductors type 14
AWG minimum stranded, rated 600 volts minimum.
4) Phototube & photodiode cables
• RG59 type, 90 % shielded minimum recommended, internal conductor stranded, BNC connector terminated.
5) X ray tube high voltage cables Full braid shielded 100 kV type.
Types ll or lll as per NEMA Standard XR 7-1979 (R 1984, 1990)
6) Mains line and protective ground cables
Unshielded type, length and wire gage must be in accordance with applicable electrical code and local regulations.
Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 ix

D. IMPORTANT SYMBOLS
Alert service representative to hazards that

could result in severe personal injury or
death.
Alert service representative to the fact that X-rays will be produced

during the detailed procedure.
Hazards which could result in equipment or property damage
Alert service representative to a procedure important for optimal

utilization of the device equipment.
x Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

E. TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION TO EPSILON TECHNICAL MANUAL ...........................................................iii

A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................ iii
B. SAFETY PROCEDURES ....................................................................................................................................... v
C. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY..................................................................................................... vi
D. IMPORTANT SYMBOLS ....................................................................................................................................... x
E. TABLE OF CONTENTS....................................................................................................................................... xi
1.0 INTRODUCTION TO EPSILON HF GENERATOR.............................................................. 1-1

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Main Characteristics of EPS 45-80 High-Voltage Generator......................................................................1-2
1.1.2 System Configuration.........................................................................................................................................1-3
1.1.3 EPS High-Voltage Generator — Options......................................................................................................1-5
1.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................................................1-9
1.2.1 RAD Mode Specifications.................................................................................................................................1-9
1.2.1.1 Tube Loading Factors...............................................................................................................................1-9
1.2.1.2 Tube Loading Modes............................................................................................................................. 1-10
1.2.1.3 Focal Spot / Anode Speed Selection................................................................................................... 1-11
Auto Focal Spot in Radiography ................................................................................................................... 1-11
Auto Focal Spot in optional Cardiac mode ................................................................................................. 1-11
1.2.1.4 AEC Mode............................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.1.5 Power Range............................................................................................................................................ 1-13
1.2.1.6 Typical kV Waveform............................................................................................................................ 1-14
1.2.2 Fluoro Mode Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.2.2.1 Fluoroscopy Types ................................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.2.2.2 General Specifications for Continuous & Pulsed Fluoroscopy ...................................................... 1-14
1.2.2.3 High Performance Pulsed Fluoroscopy.............................................................................................. 1-16
1.2.2.4 High Power Fluoroscopy Option ........................................................................................................ 1-17
1.2.2.5 ABS Modes.............................................................................................................................................. 1-17
1.2.3 Audible Alarms................................................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.2.4 Power Ratings/Line Requirements............................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.5 Miscellaneous.................................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.5.1 X-ray Tube Interface.............................................................................................................................. 1-20
1.2.5.2 Environmental Conditions.................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.5.3 Product Disposal .................................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.5.4 Physical Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.3 REGULATION AND STANDARDS............................................................................................................. 1-24
1.4 PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND REPEATABILITY........................................................................ 1-24
2.0 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Inspection of Material Received .......................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 Parts to Be Supplied By Customer...................................................................................................................2-3
Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 xi

2.2 INTERCONNECTION OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................2-4

2.3 INSTALLATION SETUP .....................................................................................................................................2-5
2.4 POWER LINE CONNECTION.........................................................................................................................2-7
2.5 X-RAY TUBE CONNECTION ..........................................................................................................................2-8
2.5.1 High Voltage Cable Connection.......................................................................................................................2-8
2.5.2 Tube Stator Connection.....................................................................................................................................2-8
2.5.3 Metal Center Section Connection ....................................................................................................................2-9
2.5.4 Thermal Switch (Tube Housing) Connection ................................................................................................2-9
2.6 EPSILON OPERATOR CONSOLE INSTALLATION............................................................................. 2-10
2.6.1 Console Installation & Connection............................................................................................................... 2-10
2.6.2 Optional Hand-Switch P/N 10018.xxx ....................................................................................................... 2-11
2.6.2.1 Hand-Switch Assembly.......................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.6.2.2 Hand-Switch Connection...................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.7 SYSTEM GROUNDING ................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.7.1 Protective Earth Ground................................................................................................................................ 2-13
2.7.2 System Grounding Configuration ................................................................................................................. 2-14
2.8 MECHANICAL ENCLOSURE OF THE GENERATOR......................................................................... 2-16
3.0 INTERFACING ........................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 SIGNAL INTERFACING TABLES...................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.1 Controller Board P/N 9798.01.........................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.2 Line Filter Board P/N 9916.00-.01..................................................................................................................3-8
3.1.3 Optional Boards..................................................................................................................................................3-9
3.1.3.1 Fluoro PMT Board P/N 9822.00 ...........................................................................................................3-9
3.1.3.2 Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro Board P/N 11030.000 ............................................................... 3-11
3.1.3.3 Relay Expansion Board P/N 9932.00................................................................................................. 3-13
3.1.3.4 Tube Switch Interface board P/N 9996.00........................................................................................ 3-13
3.1.3.5 Universal Chambers Interface Board P/N 11002.000 ..................................................................... 3-14
3.1.3.6 Auxiliary Power Supplies P/N 10023.001 & 10023.002 .................................................................. 3-14
3.1.3.7 CPX Adapter Board P/N 9990.00 ...................................................................................................... 3-15
3.2 EXPOSURE SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.2.1 Exposure Switches........................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.2.2 Hand-Switch Option ....................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3 EXPOSURE TRIGGERS................................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.4 PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL INPUTS ....................................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.1 General .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-19
3.4.1.1 Programmable Input Types .................................................................................................................. 3-19
3.4.1.2 Selectable Voltage Threshold ............................................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.1.3 Inputs with Terminated Resistor ......................................................................................................... 3-20
3.4.2 RAD & Fluoro Interlocks .............................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.4.3 RAD/Fluoro Frame Rate Selection.............................................................................................................. 3-24
3.4.4 AEC/Fluoro Lock Mode Input Type .......................................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.5 AEC Reset Input Type ................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.6 Fluoro Alarm Reset Input Type .................................................................................................................... 3-25
xii Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

3.5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS.......................................................................................................................................... 3-26

3.5.1 Digital Outputs Specification......................................................................................................................... 3-26
Optional Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro Board .................................................................................... 3-27
3.5.2 Types of Programmable Outputs.................................................................................................................. 3-27
3.5.2.1 Programmable Client Outputs ............................................................................................................. 3-28
3.5.2.2 “Alarm” Output Type............................................................................................................................ 3-28
3.5.2.3 “X-ray On” Output Type...................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.5.2.4 Frame Rate Output Type ...................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.5.2.5 Heat Units Over n % Output ............................................................................................................... 3-29
3.5.2.6 Operator Console Function Keys........................................................................................................ 3-30
3.5.3 Fast Digital Output.......................................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.5.4 Relay Contacts .................................................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.5.4.1 Power ON “K1” Relay Output (Line Filter Board) ......................................................................... 3-31
3.5.4.2 Programmable Relay Output (Line Filter Board).............................................................................. 3-31
3.5.4.3 Relay Expansion Board ......................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.6 AEC MODE INTERFACE ............................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.6.1 AEC Chambers Interfacing............................................................................................................................ 3-33
3.6.1.1 Ion Chambers.......................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.6.1.2 Solid State AEC Chambers ................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.6.2 PMT or Photodiode Interfacing.................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.6.3 Remote Analog Signal/ Flat Panel Interfacing ........................................................................................... 3-35
3.6.4 SPD Dose Tracking Interface (Optional Feature) ..................................................................................... 3-36
3.7 FLUORO INTERFACE ..................................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.7.1 Image Intensifier Pickup Device ................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.7.2 Trigger (Pulsed Fluoro)................................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.3 Fluoro Footswitch & Interlocks.................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.4 External Control for Fluoro Dose Stabilization ......................................................................................... 3-38
3.8 COMMUNICATION PORTS........................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.8.1 Communication with a Computer................................................................................................................. 3-39
3.8.2 Communication with an External Console ................................................................................................. 3-40
4.0 SYSTEM SETUP .......................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 GENERATOR POWER-ON TEST ...................................................................................................................4-4
4.2 EPSILON PC TOOLS PROGRAM....................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.1 Program Installation ...........................................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.2 Connecting the Generator to the PC Laptop.................................................................................................4-6
4.2.3 EPSILON PC TOOLS User’s Guide .......................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.3.1 Program Primer ...................................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.3.2 Data Storage and Generator's Configuration..................................................................................... 4-13
4.3 EPS GENERATOR CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................... 4-13
Software Options ............................................................................................................................................. 4-14
Hardware Options ........................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.4 TUBE SETUP ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.1 X-ray Tube Selection....................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.2 X-ray Tube Derating ....................................................................................................................................... 4-18
Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 xiii

4.5 WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................... 4-20

4.5.1 Workstation Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 4-20
RAD Exposure Types..................................................................................................................................... 4-23
AEC Devices .................................................................................................................................................... 4-23
RAD Frame Rate Setup .................................................................................................................................. 4-24
AEC Zero Point (Fluoro-RAD kV Transfer Curve) ................................................................................. 4-25
Saving/Sending Workstation Configuration ............................................................................................... 4-25
4.5.2 Programmable Inputs/Outputs Configuration........................................................................................... 4-26
Programmable Inputs Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-26
Programmable Outputs Configuration ........................................................................................................ 4-28
4.6 FLUORO CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................ 4-30
4.6.1 General Fluoro Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.6.2 Fluoro ABS Curves.......................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.6.3 Multi-Zoom Fluoro Dose Stabilization........................................................................................................ 4-34
4.7 APR SETUP........................................................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.8 CONSOLE, LANGUAGE & TIME SETTINGS ......................................................................................... 4-39
4.8.1 Console Brightness, Contrast and Volume.................................................................................................. 4-39
4.8.2 Generator Clock............................................................................................................................................... 4-40
4.8.3 Language Module............................................................................................................................................. 4-40
4.8.3.1 Setting the Operator Console Language............................................................................................. 4-41
4.8.3.2 Console Language Translation Module .............................................................................................. 4-41
5.0 FIELD-CALIBRATION .............................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 INITIAL TURN ON TESTS ................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 Tube Stator Verification ....................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1.1 Epsilon Anode Starter board P/N 9962.xx ..........................................................................................5-3
5.1.1.2 EPS Starter board P/N 11104.xxx .........................................................................................................5-4
5.1.2 Pre-Calibration Exposure Test .........................................................................................................................5-5
5.2 X-RAY TUBE CALIBRATION...........................................................................................................................5-6
5.3 EXPOSURE TESTS ...............................................................................................................................................5-8
5.3.1 Output kV Waveform ........................................................................................................................................5-8
5.3.2 mAs Verification .................................................................................................................................................5-8
5.4 MAXIMUM FLUOROSCOPIC ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE ...........................................................5-9
5.4.1 Maximum Entrance Exposure Rate Adjustment...........................................................................................5-9
5.4.2 SPD Calibration (Option)............................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.4.3 Image Enhancement Mode Calibration (Option) ...................................................................................... 5-10
5.5 FLUORO DOSE STABILIZATION (BRIGHTNESS ADJUST) ............................................................. 5-10
5.5.1 Continuous or Standard Pulsed Fluoro........................................................................................................ 5-10
5.5.1.1 PMT Phototube ABS Device ............................................................................................................... 5-10
5.5.1.2 Photodiode ABS Device ....................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.5.1.3 Ion Chamber or Remote ABS Control ............................................................................................... 5-13
5.5.2 Optional High Performance Pulsed Fluoro ................................................................................................ 5-13
5.6 FLUORO kV/mA TRACKING CURVES (CONTRAST ADJUST)........................................................ 5-14
xiv Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

5.7 ION CHAMBER SETUP & AEC CALIBRATION..................................................................................... 5-15

5.7.1 Ion Chamber Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.7.2 AEC Calibration Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.7.2.1 AEC Calibration Concept ..................................................................................................................... 5-16
A) AEC Feedback Gain Adjustment:........................................................................................................... 5-16
B) Film-Screen Correction (kV Compensation) ........................................................................................ 5-17
5.7.2.2 AEC Chamber’s Fine-Tuning Procedure ........................................................................................... 5-18
5.8 IMAGE BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................... 5-20
6.0 USER ACCEPTANCE TESTS .................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 OPERATOR CONSOLE ACCEPTANCE TEST ...........................................................................................6-2
6.2 ACCURACY OF LOADING FACTORS..........................................................................................................6-3
6.2.1 kV Accuracy.........................................................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.2 mA Accuracy .......................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3 mAs Accuracy......................................................................................................................................................6-5
6.2.4 Irradiation Time Accuracy.................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3 REPRODUCIBILITY OF LOADING FACTORS .........................................................................................6-7
6.4 LINEARITY OF LOADING FACTORS....................................................................................................... 6-12
6.5 CONSTANCY OF AEC MODE ...................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.6 AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL LIMIT.......................................................................................... 6-18
6.7 FLUORO MODE................................................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.7.1 Fluoro Console................................................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.7.2 Fluoroscopic Entrance Exposure Rate ........................................................................................................ 6-18
7.0 TROUBLESHOOTING & SERVICING.................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 WARNING...............................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 EXPOSURE INHIBITION ..................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Exposure Limits..................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Interlock Conditions...........................................................................................................................................7-3
7.3 FAULT CONDITIONS.........................................................................................................................................7-4
7.3.1 Abnormal End of Exposure .............................................................................................................................7-4
7.3.2 Operator End of Exposure ...............................................................................................................................7-4
7.3.3 Alarms...................................................................................................................................................................7-5
7.4 OPERATOR MESSAGES.....................................................................................................................................7-5
7.4.1 Informative Messages.........................................................................................................................................7-5
7.4.2 Inverter Problem Message / Power Reduction Mode..................................................................................7-6
7.4.3 Messages and Meanings .....................................................................................................................................7-7
7.5 DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES.............................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.5.1 Power On Self-Test ......................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.2 Operator Console’s Service Mode ................................................................................................................ 7-13
7.5.2.1 Invoking the System Monitor in Console’s Service Mode............................................................... 7-14
7.5.2.2 Anode Monitoring.................................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.5.2.3 IGBT Code.............................................................................................................................................. 7-15
Resetting the Generator/Basket Status ........................................................................................................ 7-15
Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 xv

7.5.2.4 Software Revision................................................................................................................................... 7-18

7.5.2.5 History Log.............................................................................................................................................. 7-18
7.5.2.6 Three-Phase Inverter Board Register.................................................................................................. 7-19
I- Inverter Board Status Register Updating ................................................................................................. 7-19
II- Inverter Board Power On Self-Test........................................................................................................ 7-20
III- Inverter Board Test on PREP................................................................................................................ 7-20
7.5.2.7 Statistics.................................................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.5.2.8 User’s Monitor Mode............................................................................................................................. 7-22
7.5.3 Epsilon PC Tools’ Diagnostic Mode............................................................................................................ 7-22
7.5.3.1 Monitor Module...................................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.5.3.2 History Log.............................................................................................................................................. 7-25
7.5.3.3 Tube Calibration Viewer ....................................................................................................................... 7-27
7.5.3.4 Generator Calibration Module ............................................................................................................. 7-28
7.5.4 Diagnostic Points............................................................................................................................................. 7-30
7.5.4.1 Controller Board P/N 9798.01 ............................................................................................................ 7-30
Test Points: ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-31
Typical Waveforms:......................................................................................................................................... 7-32
LEDs on Controller board:............................................................................................................................ 7-33
Input Voltage Reference & Threshold – J9 Connector:............................................................................ 7-33
7.5.4.2 3-Phase Inverter Boards P/N 9736.01 ............................................................................................... 7-33
Generator Power On LED: ........................................................................................................................... 7-33
7.5.4.3 Optional Fluoro Boards ........................................................................................................................ 7-34
7.5.4.4 Anode Starter Board .............................................................................................................................. 7-35
7.5.4.5 Optional Cable Discharge Interface Board P/N 11206.000 ........................................................... 7-36
7.6 REPLACEMENT OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE.......................................................................... 7-37
7.6.1 Three-Phase Inverter Board & EPS Starter Board Replacement ............................................................ 7-38
7.6.2 Generator Basket Replacement ..................................................................................................................... 7-42
7.6.2.1 Preliminary Step (Generator Configuration Data Backup).............................................................. 7-42
7.6.2.2 Replacement Procedure......................................................................................................................... 7-42
7.6.2.3 Firmware Upload and Final Verification ............................................................................................ 7-48
7.6.3 Optional Boards Replacement....................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.6.3.1 Fluoro Board Replacement ................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.6.3.2 Anode Starter Board : Refer to Section 7.6.1..................................................................................... 7-49
7.6.3.3 Relay Board and Miscellaneous boards............................................................................................... 7-49
7.6.4 Fuse and Battery Replacement....................................................................................................................... 7-50
7.6.4.1 Battery Function and Replacement ..................................................................................................... 7-50
7.6.4.2 Fuse Replacement................................................................................................................................... 7-51
7.6.5 Software Update............................................................................................................................................... 7-52
7.6.5.1 Firmware & Epsilon PC Tools............................................................................................................. 7-52
7.6.5.2 Options Chip P/N 11037.xxx.............................................................................................................. 7-54
7.7 THEORY OF OPERATION ............................................................................................................................ 7-55
7.7.1 Functional Blocks ............................................................................................................................................ 7-55
7.7.1.1 kV Output................................................................................................................................................ 7-55
7.7.1.2 Power Supply........................................................................................................................................... 7-56
7.7.1.3 mA Control.............................................................................................................................................. 7-57
7.7.1.4 Filament Selection .................................................................................................................................. 7-57
7.7.2 Description of AEC Modes ........................................................................................................................... 7-58
7.7.2.1 User Configurable Backup Time AEC Mode.................................................................................... 7-58
7.7.2.2 Hidden Backup Time AEC Mode ....................................................................................................... 7-58
7.7.2.3 Falling Load Mode ................................................................................................................................. 7-59
xvi Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

7.7.3 Generator Calibration and Configuration Data .......................................................................................... 7-60

7.7.3.1 Summary of Data.................................................................................................................................... 7-60
7.7.3.2 Integrity of Data ..................................................................................................................................... 7-60
7.7.4 Console Configuration & Communication.................................................................................................. 7-62
7.7.4.1 PC & Generator Link Types................................................................................................................. 7-62
7.7.4.2 Proprietary CANBUS Communication Protocol.............................................................................. 7-63
7.8 CONFIDENCE TEST........................................................................................................................................ 7-63
8.0 MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ..........................................................................................................................8-2
8.2 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.1 Periodic Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.2 Exposure Indicators ...........................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.2.1 RAD Exposure Indicators .......................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.2.2 “Deadman” Exposure Switch .................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.2.3 Fluoro Indicators .......................................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.2.4 X-Ray Disable Switch ...............................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.3 Annual Maintenance Procedure .......................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.3.1 Labels Inspection.......................................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.3.2 Cable Tightness / Weariness ...................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.3.3 System Grounding Inspection.................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.3.4 Field Calibrations.......................................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.3.5 Generator Data Backup............................................................................................................................8-5
8.2.3.6 Validation of AEC Mode .........................................................................................................................8-6
8.3 PACKAGING AND SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS ......................................................................................8-7
8.4 PARTS MANUAL ...................................................................................................................................................8-8
9.0 INSTALLATION REPORT ........................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1 GENERAL INFORMATION..............................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 Installation Information.....................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.2 Generator Information ......................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.3 Generator Accessories .......................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.4 Measurement Devices ........................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 GENERATOR INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.1 Inspection of Material upon Reception...........................................................................................................9-2
9.2.2 Input Line Voltage Configuration....................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.3 System Grounding Inspection ..........................................................................................................................9-2
9.3 EPSILON CONFIGURATION ..........................................................................................................................9-3
9.3.1 Generator Configuration ...................................................................................................................................9-3
9.3.1.1 Workstation Configuration ......................................................................................................................9-3
9.3.1.2 Fluoro Configuration ................................................................................................................................9-4
9.3.1.3 Input Configuration ..................................................................................................................................9-5
9.3.1.4 Output Configuration ...............................................................................................................................9-6
9.3.2 Backup Data ........................................................................................................................................................9-6
Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 xvii

9.4 INITIAL TURN-ON ..............................................................................................................................................9-7

9.4.1 Preliminary Generator Power-On Test...........................................................................................................9-7
9.4.2 Exposure Test Verification ...............................................................................................................................9-7
9.5 FIELD CALIBRATION ........................................................................................................................................9-8
9.5.1 X-ray Tube Calibration ......................................................................................................................................9-8
9.5.2 Fluoroscopic Maximum Entrance Exposure Rate ........................................................................................9-8
9.5.3 ABS Mode Adjustment (Section 5.6)...............................................................................................................9-8
9.5.4 Image AEC/Brightness Devices ......................................................................................................................9-9
9.5.5 Field Selection/Integrator Reset (Section 5.7.1) ......................................................................................... 9-10
9.5.6 Film Screen Combinations/ AEC Feedback Gain (Section 5.7.2) .......................................................... 9-10
9.6 USER ACCEPTANCE TESTS.......................................................................................................................... 9-10
xviii Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

1.0 INTRODUCTION TO EPSILON HF GENERATOR
IN THIS CHAPTER :
1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................... 1-2

1.1.1 Main Characteristics of EPS 45-80 High-Voltage Generator ............................................................1-2
1.1.2 System Configuration ...............................................................................................................................1-3
1.1.3 EPS High-Voltage Generator — Options ............................................................................................1-5
1.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 1-9

1.2.1 RAD Mode Specifications .......................................................................................................................1-9
1.2.1.1 Tube Loading Factors .......................................................................................................................1-9
1.2.1.2 Tube Loading Modes ......................................................................................................................1-10
1.2.1.3 Focal Spot / Anode Speed Selection............................................................................................1-11
Auto Focal Spot in Radiography................................................................................................................1-11
Auto Focal Spot in optional Cardiac mode..............................................................................................1-11
1.2.1.4 AEC Mode ........................................................................................................................................1-12
1.2.1.5 Power Range.....................................................................................................................................1-13
1.2.1.6 Typical kV Waveform .....................................................................................................................1-14
1.2.2 Fluoro Mode Specifications...................................................................................................................1-14
1.2.2.1 Fluoroscopy Types ..........................................................................................................................1-14
1.2.2.2 General Specifications for Continuous & Pulsed Fluoro..........................................................1-14
1.2.2.3 High Performance Pulsed Fluoroscopy .......................................................................................1-16
1.2.2.4 High Power Fluoroscopy Option..................................................................................................1-17
1.2.2.5 ABS Modes .......................................................................................................................................1-17
1.2.3 Audible Alarms ........................................................................................................................................1-18
1.2.4 Power Ratings/Line Requirements ......................................................................................................1-19
1.2.5 Miscellaneous ...........................................................................................................................................1-20
1.2.5.1 X-ray Tube Interface .......................................................................................................................1-20
1.2.5.2 Environmental Conditions.............................................................................................................1-20
1.2.5.3 Product Disposal..............................................................................................................................1-21
1.2.5.4 Physical Dimensions........................................................................................................................1-21
1.3 REGULATION AND STANDARDS ............................................................................................................ 1-24
1.4 PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND REPEATABILITY ....................................................................... 1-24
Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 1-1

1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The EPS 45-80 High-Voltage generator is an Advanced High Frequency X-ray Generator designed
with a unique power inverter technology and modular conception.
As more power or custom features are needed, they are simply added using plug-in modules quickly
inserted to the generator's main core. The latter consists of an electronic controller driving an
encapsulated (oil-free) high-voltage unit. The generator comes in different configurations, best
suited to conventional RAD & Fluoro applications and to the latest digital procedures.
1.1.1 Main Characteristics of EPS 45-80 High-Voltage Generator

1. The EpsilonTM technology achieves variable frequency operation at up to 240 kHz, producing
kV flatness waveform and outstanding rise time swiftness (see Figure 1.4, page 14).
• This realization embodies important technological achievements designed with
innovative power switching inverter modules and a cascaded series of high frequency
power transformers embedded in a solid dielectric high voltage unit.
• Extremely sharp kV waveform, with rise and fall times unparalleled in the industry,
achieves superior image quality and reduced soft radiation.
2. A modular concept allowing large OEMs to efficiently manage the system configuration and
costs in order to compete successfully in today’s competitive world.
3. Smart Inverter Management optimizing the life of Inverter boards.
4. An exceptionally high efficiency which allows for less severe mains line impedance requirements.
5. Universal Line Voltage Input, allowing simple worldwide installation.
6. Self-diagnostic methods, using redundant circuits.
7. Epsilon PC Tools program used for installing, setting up and servicing the Epsilon High-
Voltage generator. The program features a system monitor mode, a history log and a statistics
register to record and track back important events occurring during the course of the generator
maintenance and normal operation.
8. RS-232 (or CAN) software providing full flexibility for customer control.
9. Automatic X-ray tube calibration.
1-2 Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

1. Introduction to Epsilon HF Generator
1.1.2 System Configuration

A universal platform exists for conventional RAD & RF applications (from 30 kW to 80 kW) and
for cardiac application (50 kW to 100 kW).
Epsilon High-Voltage Generator Configuration

EPS “wp” Ex.; EPS 65R, EPS 80CV
w = Power range (30 to 100 kW); p = Purpose of equipment
Purpose of Equipment
RAD Fluoro Cardiac Vascular
R – – –
RF – –
C –
CV
CVX High-end High-end High-end
Modular EPS Generator EPS Generator inside cabinet
RF Epsilon Operator Console CV Epsilon Operator Console

Figure 1.1 – EPS 45-80 High-Voltage Generator main configurations.

Workstations : Up to 6 workstations, depending on EPS configuration.
X-ray tube : One dual focal spot X-ray tube. Two-Tube option available.
Anode drive : Integrated Low or Dual Speed Rotor Controller. See options in § 1.1.3.
APR exams : Programmable technique chart consisting of up to 2000 fully customizable

exams, stored in the Epsilon Operator Console. Every single step on the APR program
leads to a new set of parameters, every time more fitted with the intended exam. This
reduces the number of key strokes.
The APR can be programmed to behave as a traditional APR with 7 regions per workstation,
8-10 exams per region and up to 4 patient sizes.
AEC mode : Ion chamber, photomultiplier tube, photodiode or flat panel.
Fluoro : On RF & CV configurations:

• Continuous, Pulsed Fluoro and optional High Performance Pulsed Fluoro available;
Dual Fluoro mode available (Continuous & Pulsed Fluoro switchable at the console)
• Two (2) adjustable maximum Fluoro Entrance Rates;
• Four (4) programmable kV/mA tracking curves for ABS control;
• Standard Pulsed Fluoro @ up to 30 pulses/second;
• Optional High Performance Pulsed Fluoro :
o Image Enhancement mode, providing better signal-to-noise ratio;
o Dose Reduction mode;
o Optional Source to Patient Distance (SPD) Integrator
The generator adjusts the X-ray beam to compensate for the source-to-patient
distance (SPD) when the gantry position varies during an exam. This provides
constant surface dose along the full SPD span [mAs/pulse ∝ (1/SPD)2].
o Optional Cable Discharge Unit (see options in § 1.1.2 for description);
o Optional High Frame Rate, up to 90 pulses/second.

1.1.3 EPS High-Voltage Generator — Options
Epsilon Operator Console P/N 9777.xx
An elegant X-ray control panel that affords simple control of the EPS High-Voltage generator.
Depending on configuration, the console controls between 4 and 6 workstations with more than
2000 APR exams divided in 3 or 4 patient sizes.
Exposure buttons, optical density correction, and many feedbacks from the X-ray room and/or
X-ray tube are provided. The technique factors are quickly available for both pre-exposure and post-
exposure visualization.
Figure 1.2 – Graphic Screen on the Epsilon Operator Console.
The console also includes a built-in service mode and a diagnostic mode, displayed in a graphic
screen. Connection to the generator is carried out by a 23.6-m (50-foot) console cable (other cable
lengths are optional).
Rotor Controller P/N 9962.xx or P/N 11104.xxx
Microprocessor-controlled electronic board that powers the anode rotation at low (60 Hz) or dual
speed (60/180 Hz), for one or two X-ray tubes. Anode rotation is independent of mains line
frequency. The Epsilon Rotor Controller supports most common stator types.
Two-Tube Option P/N 10020.000
The 2-Tube option provides a standalone X-ray tube switch and the necessary hardware & software
to drive two different X-ray tubes from a single generator. Optionally, the 2-tube assembly can be
enclosed in a decorative cabinet.
High Performance Radiography P/N 10010.000
High Performance Radiography option is available on EPS 80 configurations only. It extends the
irradiation time from 10 seconds to 63 seconds, and the mAs factor from 1000 up to 12,500 mAs on
some very high capacity X-ray tubes.

High Performance Pulsed Fluoro P/N 10012.000
High Performance Pulsed Fluoro is performed on standard X-ray tubes (no grid), using a
programmable surface dose rate and a variable pulse width. It is done in Dose Reduction or Image
Enhancement mode.
• Dose reduction lowers average patient dose at slower pulse rates while keeping the same
dose per pulse (the pulse count is reduced).
• Image enhancement provides clearer, less noisy images at slower pulse rates while
keeping the patient dose about constant.
• Source to Patient Distance Dose Compensation Option:
The generator adjusts the X-ray beam to compensate for the
source-to-patient distance (SPD) when the gantry position
varies during an exam. This provides constant surface dose
along the full SPD span.
mAs/pulse ∝ (1/SPD)2
• High Frame Rate option: Typically dedicated for high grade special procedures, this
option allows image acquisition at up to 90 frames per second, RAD & Fluoro.
Continuous Fluoro can be enabled using the service mode, for example to troubleshoot the Fluoro
imaging chain.
High Performance Pulsed Fluoro versus Standard Pulsed Fluoro

Features Standard Pulsed Fluoro High Performance Pulsed Fluoro
Minimum mA 16 mA 5 mA
Minimum mAs 0.08 mAs 0.025 mAs
Maximum Pulse Rate 30 p/s 90 p/s (with High Frame Rate option)
Maximum Fluoro Duty Cycle 33 % 50 %
Maximum kV @ low mAs/pulse Variable, from 125 to 40 kV, Always 125 kV
(mAs/pulse < 0.25) as per mAs/pulse
Cardiac Auto-kW Not available Optional
Multi-Zoom Function Not available 4 magnification levels available
SPD Dose Compensation Not available Optional
High Power Fluoro P/N 10011.000
Performs continuous Fluoro at up to 140 kV & 20 mA.

Auxiliary Power Supplies P/N 10023.000 (.002)
Provides a medical grade power supply rated 24 VAC, 150 VA (6.25A) and 24 VDC (2.7A), 65W.
Auxiliary Power Supplies P/N 10023.001
Provides a medical grade power supply rated 24 VDC (2.7A), 65W.
DAP Interface P/N 10028.000
The DAP Interface option allows interfacing a DAP measurement device

on the Epsilon Operator Console to display the radiation level a patient is
exposed to in radiological exams. Cumulative dose area product (DAP)
would also be printed when an optional DAP printer is connected to the
generator.
Cable Discharge Unit P/N 10027.000 (EPS CV configurations)

The Cable Discharge Unit provides the EPS 45-80 High-Voltage generator with an electronic crowbar
mechanism that permits multiple exposures at precise exposure times using rapid rise and fall times along a
broad spectrum of tube mA, on standard (no grid) X-ray tubes.
The quick turning on and off of the high-voltage output dramatically improves the quality of images acquired
from cineradiography, digital subtraction angiography, digital radiography and Pulsed Fluoro.
Optional Cable Discharge Unit Two typical kVp waveforms superimposed

(Shown here with fans for increased duty cycle) for the benefit of comparison

Universal Chambers Interface Board P/N 11002.000
Consists of a plug-in board and the necessary software to perform AEC exposures on up to 3 solid
state AEC chambers. This board includes also an additional interface for a standard ion chamber.
Increased Duty Cycle P/N 10005.000
Increases the generator efficiency by using built-in thermostatic cooling fans.
Decorative Cabinet P/N 10017.001

< Epsilon Operator Console
This option (A) affords mechanical enclosure of the (C)
generator by providing a high quality cabinet that covers
the Epsilon High-Voltage generator and hides out the
mains cable entry. Multiple passageway configurations are
possible for High-Voltage cables. (A)
(B)
Custom Pedestal Stand P/N 10003.000
Supplies a practical stand for the operator console.
Handswitch P/N 10018.000 (.001)
An X-ray Hand-Switch (C) provides the Epsilon operator console with a hand held push-button
switch that can be extended 3.8 m (8 feet) from the operator console. Does not permit Fluoro
activation.
Can be installed on the left or right side of the console.

1.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.2.1 RAD Mode Specifications
1.2.1.1 Tube Loading Factors

kV From 40 to 150 kV, with 1-kV steps.
mA From 10 to 1000 mA, with 25% increment steps (up to 21 stations):

10; 12.5; 16; 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63; 80;
100; 125; 160; 200; 250; 320; 400; 500 (1); 630 (2); 800 (3); 1000 (4).
(1) For 45 kW and above configurations only (3) For 65 kW and above configurations only
(2) For 50 kW and above configurations only (4) For 80 kW and above configurations only
Irradiation time From 1.0 ms (1) to 10 seconds (2), with 25% increment steps (41 stations):
1.0 (1); 1.25; 1.6; 2.0; 2.5; 3.2; 4.0; 5.0; 6.3; 8.0; ms
10; 12.5; 16; 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; ms
100; 125; 160; 200; 250; 320; 400; 500; 630; 800; ms
1.0; 1.25; 1.6; 2.0; 2.5; 3.2; 4.0; 5.0; 6.3; 8.0; 10.0 seconds.
(1) Minimum irradiation time in AEC = 5.0 ms
(2) Maximum irradiation time with optional High Performance Radiography = 63 seconds.
mAs From 0.4 to 1000 mAs (1), with 25% increment steps (up to 35 stations)
0.4; 0.5; 0.63; 0.8; 1.0; 1.25; 1.6; 2.0; 2.5; 3.2;
4.0; 5.0; 6.3; 8.0; 10; 12.5; 16; 20; 25; 32;
40; 50; 63; 80; 100; 125; 160; 200; 250; 320;
400; 500; 630 (2, 3); 800; 1000.
(1) Maximum mAs in the optional High Performance Radiography: 12 500 mAs.
(2) 600 mAs max. in AEC mode.
(3) 500 mAs maximum for 30 kW configuration.

1.2.1.2 Tube Loading Modes

The generator provides single and serial tube loading with manual and AEC-controlled irradiation
time (Table 1).
Table 1- Available Tube Loading modes
Single Exposure Description
3-Point Loads the tube at specific kV, mA and irradiation time factors.
2-Point Loads the tube at specific kV and mAs factors.

AEC mode Loads the tube …
In AEC-mA @ specific kV & mA factors and adjustable backup time (for a given kV);
In AEC-mAs @ specific kV & backup mAs factors;
AEC-Zero Point @ specific backup mAs factor and automatic kV selection based on Fluoro
stabilization (ABS or manual);
AEC-Falling Load In AEC-mAs exposure, the tube is loaded at a higher tube current value, after
(option) which the mA drops as the exposure proceeds.
Serial Exposure Description
Loads the tube as in normal AEC mode for the first frame, and uses the measured
AEC-Lock Mode
mAs factor for the remaining tube loadings.
Exposures performed using constant mA algorithm (variable kW). This method
Cardiac-mA (1)
intends to reduce the patient dose.
Exposures performed using constant kW algorithm (variable mA). This method
Cardiac-kW (1)
intends to improve the image contrast.
Automatic serial exposure mode that combines pre-selected parameters with auto-
D.S.A./D.A. (1)
kV mode and AEC feedback.
General Serial Exposure :
Frame rate 7 pulse rates available at the operator console and service programmable from 0.25
up to 30 f/s (2, 3). Operative frame rate selected by the operator, by APR, or by a remote
selection through digital input(s) to the generator.
Run length 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 60 seconds (4).
Tube kW Both operative frame rate and run length impacts on the allowed tube kW load. The
generator ensures the X-ray tube operating parameters are within safe limits.
Notes (1) Available on optional configurations only. (2) Faster frame rates are available as an option.
(3) When the serial tube loading is synchronized using an external trigger, the rate of the tube's loading
will be slowed down if the triggers fail to come at the expected speed.
(4) The run length corresponds to the maximum total duration of repeated tube loadings allowed by the
generator for a distinct exposure switch actuation.

1.2.1.3 Focal Spot / Anode Speed Selection

Manual and automatic focal spot selection can be selected in RAD.
Auto Focal Spot in Radiography

In auto focal spot selection, the filament is determined as a function of the technique kW and the
anode speed. Table 2 below shows the generator algorithm for the selection of the focal spot and
anode rotation speed when auto speed and auto focal spot are enabled. The anode speed is not user
alterable as it is set in the workstation configuration (Chapter 4).
Table 2- Focal spot and anode speed selection

as a function of technique kW
Tube Loading Focal Spot / Anode Speed
kW Small/Low
Small/High
Large/Low
Large/High
kW
Auto Focal Spot in optional Cardiac mode

In cineradiography auto focal spot mode, the generator selects the focal spot in RAD as a function
of the stabilization kV in Fluoro versus a pre-determined kV-threshold value. When Fluoro
stabilizes above the kV threshold value, the next cardiac run uses the large filament. When Fluoro
stabilizes below the kV threshold value, the next cardiac run uses the small filament.
For more information, refer to “Cardiovascular Configuration, Technical

Manual Supplement, P/N 11050.012” in the electronic documentation CD.

1.2.1.4 AEC Mode

Two ion chambers are supported on the standard generator. Different other AEC sensors can be
interfaced, depending on the generator configuration.
Refer to Section 2.1.2 for recommended devices.
• Ionization chambers
Two ion chambers support 3 user-selectable fields and 3 film-screen correction tables to
compensate for film density relating to film-screen kV curve characteristics. Compensation
ranges from – 80 % up to + 130 % of the phototiming level, for twelve (12) kV stations, from
42 through 133 kV. Additional ion chambers are provided as an option:
Optional board Number/Type of AEC Chamber
Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro board P/N 11030.000 2 conventional ion chambers (*)
Universal Chambers Interface Board P/N 11002.000 1 conventional ion chamber (*)
3 solid state chambers (**)
CPX Adapter board P/N 9990.00 1 conventional ion chamber (***)
(*) Usable input signal range from 0.1V to 10V or from – 0.1V to – 10V.
(**) Positive or negative input signal current.
(***) Usable input signal range from 0.1V to 10V.
• One photomultiplier tube (Option, requires the presence of an additional board).

Gain is adjusted via a high voltage bias supply which can be varied from about -200 V to
about -950 V.
• One photodiode (Option, requires the presence of an additional board).
Usable input signal range is from about 12.5 mV to 9 V or from about -12.5 mV to -9 V
Photo-timing range Minimum irradiation time: 5 ms

Maximum mAs: 600 mAs
Optical density adjustment

Six clinically significant optical density corrections are provided with the AEC mode, varying from
the standardized optical density N= 1. See Figure 1.2 below.
Optical density correction (Ion Chamber)

0.57 0.69 0.83 1 1.2 1.45 1.75
-3 -2 -1 Normal +1 +2 +3
75 % 82 % 90 % 100 % 110 % 121 % 133 %

Optical density correction (PMT or Photodiode)
Figure 1.3 – Useful range of optical densities in AEC mode.

1.2.1.5 Power Range
Table 3- Maximum Power Outputs (*) versus Tube mA (Intermittent Mode)

EPS 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000
ITube
Config. mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA
Max. kV > 150 120 93 75 – – – –
EPS 30
Max. kW > 30 kW – – – –
Max. kV > 150 150 140 112 90 – – –

EPS 45
Max. kW > 30 37 45 kW – – –
Max. kV > 150 150 150 125 100 79 – –

EPS 50
Max. kW > 30 37 48 50 kW – –
Max. kV > 150 150 150 137 110 87 – –

EPS 55
Max. kW > 30 37 48 55 kW – –
Max. kV > 150 150 150 150 130 103 81 –

EPS 65
Max. kW > 30 37 48 60 65 kW –
Max. kV > 150 150 150 150 140 111 87 –

EPS 70
Max. kW > 30 37 48 60 70 kW –
Max. kV > 150 150 150 150 150 127 100 80

EPS 80
Max. kW > 30 37 48 60 75 80 kW
Max. kV > 150 150 150 150 150 127 112 90

EPS 90
Max. kW > 30 37 48 60 75 80 89.6 90 kW
Max. kV > 150 150 150 150 150 127 113 100
EPS 100
Max. kW > 30 37 48 60 75 80 90.4 100 kW
(*) Nominal electric power values (kW) are given for a loading time no less than 100 ms.

1.2.1.6 Typical kV Waveform
Tube loading:
100 kV, 400 mA, 10 ms
Typical kV rise time:

175 µs
Figure 1.4 – Typical kV Waveform.
1.2.2 Fluoro Mode Specifications

1.2.2.1 Fluoroscopy Types
1. Continuous & Pulsed Fluoro available on standard Epsilon configurations (refer to § 1.2.2.2).
2. High Performance Pulsed Fluoro is optional (refer to § 1.2.2.3).
3. High Power Fluoro (Cont.) is optional (refer to § 1.2.2.4).
1.2.2.2 General Specifications for Continuous & Pulsed Fluoro
Table 4- Fluoro Loading Factors

kV range 40 to 125 kV, in one-kV steps, with programmable kV range.
mA range 0.2 to 12.5 mA.
(Cont. Fluoro) Manual continuous Fluoro mA stations:
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1
1.3 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.6
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.6 6.3 7.1 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.5
mAs range From 0.08 up to 5.0 mAs, depending on pulse rate and kV operation.
(Pulsed Fluoro) 1. 0.08 ≤ mAs ≤ 0.22 @ 30 p/s & kV ≤ 110
2. 0.25 ≤ mAs ≤ 0.90 @ 30 p/s & kV ≤ 125
3. Up to 1.8 mAs @ 15 p/s & kV ≤ 125
4. Up to 2.8 mAs @ 10 p/s & kV ≤ 125
5. Up to 3.6 mAs @ 7.5 p/s & kV ≤ 125
6. Up to 5.0 mAs @ ≤ 5 p/s & kV ≤ 125
Pulse rate 0.25 up to 30 p/s (7 pulse rates available at the operator console).

DUAL FLUORO: Permits to switch from pulsed to continuous Fluoro at the Epsilon operator
console, and vice versa.
ANODE ROTATION: Low, high or RAD speed.
FOCAL SPOT : Continuous Fluoro: Small filament (large filament if small filament opens);
Pulsed Fluoro: Small or large filament, as a function of the tube mA.
ALARM : Continuous alarm every 5-minute Fluoro interval. The alarm is shut down by
pressing a key on the Epsilon console or by using a digital input to the generator.
TIMER : Fluoro timer cumulated during the Fluoro exam. The timer is displayed and reset at
the Epsilon operator console.
SHUTDOWN: Fluoro shutdown after 10 minutes of uninterrupted Fluoro.
FLUORO ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE:

Two distinct Fluoro entrance maximum exposure rates are supported. The generator controls the
Fluoro surface dose rate as a function of the kV, pulse rate and, optionally, of the source-to-patient
distance (Table 5). Before using the generator clinically, the maximum Fluoroscopic entrance
exposure rate must be adjusted by the service representative using Epsilon PC Tools.
Table 5- Fluoroscopic Entrance Exposure Rate Critical Parameters

Parameter Controlled/Set by Setting
kV Generator Set to maximum Fluoro kV
Pulse rate (1) Generator Set to maximum pulse rate
SPD minimum User Set to minimum SPD
mA in Continuous Fluoro User 0.2 to 12.5 mA
mAs / pulse (1) User 0.08 to 5.0 mAs
(1) In Pulsed Fluoro.
ABS CURVES:
Four (4) service programmable kV/mA tracking curves are provided to improve the contrast during
ABS stabilization. The current ABS curve can be changed from the operator console.

1.2.2.3 High Performance Pulsed Fluoroscopy

This option allows doing Pulsed Fluoroscopy on standard X-ray tubes, with no grid, in Dose
reduction mode or in Image Enhancement mode.
• Dose Reduction mode: This mode reduces the total Fluoro dose to the patient by
decreasing the pulse rate operation.
• Image Enhancement mode: This mode improves the image contrast at lower Fluoro
speeds by increasing the mAs per pulse, using a programmable mAs factor. When Fluoro
is performed at a pulse rate slower than maximum, the instantaneous Fluoroscopic
entrance exposure rate might be increased by a certain amount (programmable factor).
This feature enhances the image quality without being detrimental to the total
Fluoroscopic entrance exposure rate, as depicted in Table 7.
Table 6- High Performance Pulsed Fluoro Loading Factors

kV range 40 to 125 kV, in one-kV steps, with programmable kV range.
mAs range From 0.025 up to 5.0 mAs @ any pulse rate and any kV.
Pulse rate 0.25 up to 30 p/s (7 pulse rates available at the operator console).
Up to 90 p/s with High Frame Rate option.
Table 7- High Performance Pulsed Fluoro (Typical Setup)

I -Dose Reduction Mode
p/s Dose to Patient mAs/min

Reduces the total Fluoro dose
to the patient by decreasing 30 Total dose to patient (mAs/min) x 1
the pulse rate operation. 15 One half total dose to patient (mAs/min) ÷ 2
10 One third total dose to patient (mAs/min) ÷ 3
7.5 One fourth total dose to patient (mAs/min) ÷ 4
5.0 One sixth total dose to patient (mAs/min) ÷ 6
3.75 One eighth total dose to patient (mAs/min) ÷ 8
II -Image Enhancement Mode
p/s Image Enhancement mAs Factor

Improves the image contrast
(greater mAs/pulse) at lower 30 No mAs x 1
Fluoro speeds using a mAs 15 Yes mAs x 2
correction factor.
10 Yes mAs x 3
7.5 Yes mAs x 4

ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE (HIGH PERFORMANCE PULSED FLUORO)

Two distinct Fluoro entrance exposure rates are supported. The generator controls the Fluoro
surface dose rate as a function of the kV, pulse rate and, optionally, of the source-to-patient
distance. Before using the generator clinically, the maximum Fluoroscopic entrance exposure rate
must be adjusted by the installer using Epsilon PC Tools (Table 8).
Table 8- H.P. Pulsed Fluoroscopic Entrance Exposure Rate Critical Parameters

Parameter Controlled/Set by Setting
kV Generator Set to maximum Fluoro kV
Pulse rate Generator Set to maximum pulse rate
SPD minimum User Set to minimum SPD
SPD maximum (1) User Set to maximum SPD
mAs / pulse User 0.025 to 5.0 mAs
Image Enhancement factor User See Table 7
(1) With SPD Dose Compensation option.
1.2.2.4 High Power Fluoroscopy Option

High Power Fluoro allows performing continuous Fluoroscopy on certain X-ray tubes, with tube
loading up to 140 kV and 20 mA.
1.2.2.5 ABS Modes

Different ABS sensors can be interfaced for Fluoro image automatic stabilization, depending on the
generator configuration. Refer to Section 2.1.2 for recommended devices (not supplied with the
generator).
Continuous Fluoroscopy
• Photomultiplier tube; Requires the Fluoro PMT board P/N 9822.00. Gain is adjusted via a
high-voltage bias supply which can be varied from about -200V to about -950V.
• Photodiode; Requires the Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro board P/N 11030.000.
Usable input signal range is from about 5 mV to 1 V or from about -5 mV to -1 V.
• CCD camera or Flat Panel;

Usable input signal range is from 0.1V to 10V or from -0.1V to -10V.

Pulsed Fluoroscopy
• Photomultiplier tube: Requires the Fluoro PMT board P/N 9822.00. Gain is adjusted via a
high voltage bias supply which can be varied from about -200V to about -950V.
• Photodiode: Requires the Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro board P/N 11030.000.
Usable input signal range is from about 12.5 mV to 9 V or from about -12.5 mV to -9 V.
• Ionization chamber: See “Ionization chambers” in Section 1.2.1.4 for details.
1.2.3 Audible Alarms
Table 9- Audible Alarms

Alarms in Fluoro
Fluoro Alarm Tone
Pulsed tone: Low Fluoro=> 1 beep/2 seconds

“Fluoro beam-on" alarm (1)
High Fluoro => 1 beep/second
“Fluoro 5-minute elapsed” alarm (2) Continuous tone
“Anode H.U. over 80%” alarm Pulsed tone (2 beeps per second)
“System Fault” alarm 4 consecutive beeps

1. This alarm is heard in the X-ray room only and requires the presence of an external buzzer (not
provided with the generator).
2. The alarm is shut off by pressing the Alarm Reset key at the Epsilon Operator Console.
Alarms in RAD
Exposure Alarm Tone
“X-ray beam-on" alarm (3) Continuous tone
“80 % of maximum run length” alarm Pulsed tone (2 beeps per second)
Exposure Fault and B.U.T. alarms 4 consecutive beeps
3. The tone lasts for the duration of the X-ray exposure (1/4 second minimum).

1.2.4 Power Ratings/Line Requirements

The generator requires a three-phase electrical line with a protective earth ground (4 or 5 wires (*)).
Standard line regulation from no load to full load will provide full power output, at maximum kV.
Table 10- Power Ratings and Electric Line Requirements

Apparent Nominal Electric Power
Mains Voltage Over-current
Epsilon Resistance of Long Term(6)
VAC ± 10% Releases(4) Short Term
Configuration Supply Mains RAD/Fluoro
(3 Phases) (1,2) (A)
(Ω)(3) (A)(5) (KVA) (A) (KVA)
400V 0.44 59 40 2.0/3.4
EPS 30 60 5.0/7.0
480V 0.64 46 39 2.4/4.1
400V 0.22 85 58 2.0/3.4
EPS 45 80 5.0/7.0
480V 0.32 72 60 2.4/4.1
400V 0.17 102 68 2.0/3.4
EPS 50 100 5.0/7.0
480V 0.24 85 70 2.4/4.1
400V 0.17 109 73 2.0/3.4
EPS 55 100 5.0/7.0
480V 0.22 92 76 2.4/4.1
400V 0.17 124 85 2.0/3.4
EPS 65
100 5.0/7.0
480V 0.16 105 88 2.4/4.1
400V 0.17 132 90 2.0/3.4
EPS 70 100 5.0/7.0
480V 0.16 112 93 2.4/4.1
400V 0.11 150 102 2.0/3.4
EPS 80
100 5.0/7.0
480V 0.16 125 105 2.4/4.1
400V 0.11 170 116 2.0/3.4
EPS 90 100 5.0/7.0
480V 0.16 145 122 2.4/4.1
400V 0.09 200 136 2.0/3.4
EPS 100 100 5.0/7.0
480V 0.12 165 138 2.4/4.1
Notes
(1) Automatic mains line selection (no transformer tap configuration required). Automatic kW derating when
mains line voltage drops below -12%.
(2) Line Frequency tolerance from 47 to 63 Hz.
(3) With lower impedance lines, expect approx. 15% more current in Epsilon input current.
(4) Thermal breaker recommended. The over-current releases values are suggested figures only. The selected
value should have current rating versus time curve characteristics higher than the ratings specified.
Consult a qualified electrical contractor to comply with local electrical bylaw and site electrical installation.
(5) Nominal line current values; if electric line goes to minus 10%, the input current will then increase by 10%.
(6) Values based on Continuous Fluoroscopy at 125 kV @ max. 10 mA for EPS RF configurations and on
standby mode for EPS RAD configurations (no continuous X-ray for RAD High-Voltage generators).
For High Performance Fluoro optional configuration (140 kV @ max. 20 mA), the long-term current
nominal values are 9.2A/6.4KVA (@ 400 VAC) and 7.7A/6.4KVA (@ 480 VAC).
(*) Maximum wire gauge : 0 AWG (50 mm)

1.2.5 Miscellaneous
1.2.5.1 X-ray Tube Interface

Type of Tubes Class 1 B (IEC Classification).
Number of Tubes One X-ray tube standard; 2-tube configuration available as an option.
Models Most popular X-ray tube models are supported through a built-in X-ray tube
chart. Other X-ray tube models may be added by the installer.
Tube Filaments
Current range : Up to 8.1 RMS amperes
Filament power : Maximum 100 watts
Focal spot number : 2
Tube Derating
The tube can be derated to extend its usable lifetime, to troubleshoot specific conditions or other
reasons.
1.2.5.2 Environmental Conditions
TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY
• Storage : - 25 to + 70°C • Storage : 30 to 95 %, non-condensing
• Operating : + 10 to + 40°C • Operating : 30 to 75 %, non-condensing
SYSTEM BTU ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE

200 BTU/hr in idle 700 hPa to 1060 hPa (hectoPascal)
AUDIBLE NOISE Less than 52 dbA @ 1 m
VIBRATION SHOCK Product packaged to meet air-sea-ground transportation requirements

1.2.5.3 Product Disposal

At the end of its usable lifetime, no particular action is necessary for the disposal of the
product except those locally in force at the installation site.
If the EPS generator is fit with the optional cable discharge unit (high-end Cardiac configurations),
this latter contains approximately 30 liters of dielectric oil. When comes the time to dispose of the
cable discharge unit, it must done in a way that respects the local environmental regulations in force.
1.2.5.4 Physical Dimensions
Figure 1.5 – Operator Console Dimensions.

Dimension in mm (inches) Wide Height Depth Weight (*)

Generator (stand alone) 441 (17 3/8) 492 (19 3/8) 578 (22 3/4) 64-75 kg (140-165 lb)
” .. with cabinet 472 (18 1/2) 812 (19 3/8) 768 (30 1/4) 79-90 kg (175-200 lb)
” .. with 2-Tube option & cabinets 472 (18 1/2) 1268 (50) 768 (30 1/4) 113- 124 kg (250-275 lb)
” .. with Cable Discharge option 472 (18 1/2) 1268 (30 1/4) 768 (30 1/4) 125- 136 kg (275-300 lb)
(*) Approximately, as a function of power configuration
Figure 1.6 – Epsilon Dimensions and Center of Gravity (C.G.)

H.V. Cables H.V. Cables

Access Access
768
44 472 30 1/4"
1 3/4" 18 5/8"
141
5 1/2"
750 812
29 1/2"
32"
656
25 7/8"
174
6 7/8"
48
37
H.V. Cables
1 7/8" Access
81 303 1 1/2"
23 680
3 1/4" 12"
7/8" 26 3/4"
H.V. Cables
Access 781
30 3/4"
Front face of EPS Cabinet Side of EPS Cabinet
1 2
2
Upper left side cable access
(also possible on right side)
Upper front cable access
EPS generator inside decorative cabinet
(also possible on rear face)
Multiple High-Voltage Cables Access
1 = Side panels (2)

2 = Horizontal supports (2)
(in flat or upright position)
Lower front cable access
Lower left side cable access
(also possible on rear face)
(also possible on right side)
Figure 1.7 – Decorative Cabinet dimensions and different possible cable access.

1.3 REGULATION AND STANDARDS
Epsilon High-Voltage Generators comply with the following standards and regulations (Table 11).
Table 11- Regulation and Standards

Market Type Standard
Canada CSA C22.2 No. 601-1
USA Safety UL 60601-1 & IEC 60601-2-7
Health This equipment complies with the Radiation Performance, 21CFR,

Sub-chapter J.
Europe EN 60601-1; EN 60601-1-2; EN 60601-1-3 EN60601-2-7; EN 60601-1-4

Based on the declaration of conformity, this unit complies with European harmonized
standards for the application of the CE Mark.
Note The conformity is based on the equipment configured and interconnected as described
in the present Technical Manual. Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly
approved by emd technologies could void its conformity to applicable standards.
1.4 PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND REPEATABILITY
Table 12- Accuracy and Repeatability Specifications (1) Conditions

Accuracy Repeatability kV mA mAs Time
kV(2) ± (5% + 2 kV) ± (1% + 0.25 kV) Any Any Any > 5 ms
mA ± (5% + 0.5 mA) ± (2.5% + 0.5 mA) Any Any Any > 40 ms
mAs ± (5% + 0.2 mAs) ± (2.5% + 0.2 mAs) Any Any Any > 5 ms
Irradiation Time(3) ± (5% + 0.2 ms) ± (1% + 0.2 ms) Any Any Any Any
Notes:
1. Accuracy specifications were measured at 100 kV at half the nominal power with 35 feet
(10.7 m) H.V. cable between H.V. Power Supply and X-ray tube.
2. 0.5 kV ripple at 100 kV, 250 mA with 50' (15.25 m) High-Voltage cables
3. Irradiation time represents the time interval between the instant that the tube potential has risen
for the first time to a value of 80% and the instant at which it finally drops below the same value.

2.0 INSTALLATION
This section describes the physical installation and electrical supply of the generator. Interfacing, system
settings and calibration are described in subsequent chapters.
IN THIS CHAPTER :
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 2-2

2.1.1 Inspection of Material Received..................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Parts to Be Supplied By Customer ................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 INTERCONNECTION OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 2-4
2.3 INSTALLATION SETUP ................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4 POWER LINE CONNECTION ....................................................................................................... 2-7
2.5 X-RAY TUBE CONNECTION......................................................................................................... 2-8

2.5.1 High Voltage Cable Connection .................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5.2 Tube Stator Connection.................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.5.3 Metal Center Section Connection.................................................................................................. 2-9
2.5.4 Thermal Switch (Tube Housing) Connection.............................................................................. 2-9
2.6 EPSILON OPERATOR CONSOLE INSTALLATION ............................................................ 2-10

2.6.1 Console Installation & Connection ............................................................................................. 2-10
2.6.2 Optional Hand-Switch P/N 10018.xxx ...................................................................................... 2-11
2.6.2.1 Hand-Switch Assembly.............................................................................................................. 2-11
2.6.2.2 Hand-Switch Connection .......................................................................................................... 2-11
2.7 SYSTEM GROUNDING .................................................................................................................. 2-13

2.7.1 Protective Earth Ground .............................................................................................................. 2-13
2.7.2 System Grounding Configuration................................................................................................ 2-14
2.8 MECHANICAL ENCLOSURE OF THE GENERATOR ........................................................ 2-16

INSTALLATION REPORT (SECTION 9)

During the Installation (Section 2), Interfacing (Section 3), Configuration (Section 4) and
Calibration (Section 5) processes of the generator, an Installation Report should be filled out.
A filled in copy of the report should be retained in your files for future reference.
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Inspection of Material Received

The generator is shipped in a heavy-duty cardboard box (or in a wooden box available in option).
Upon its reception, check the "DROP (G) TELL" impact indicator. Open the box and verify the
parts received against the packing list placed in a brown envelope. Do not proceed with the
installation if the equipment received is damaged; file a claim with the carrier and/or insurance
company.
The packing list enumerates all parts shipped with the generator and their serial numbers. A copy of
the list should be left on the site and a second copy should be filed at the installer's office. Inspect all
parts for any mechanical damage that could directly or indirectly impair the operation of the system.
1. Epsilon High-Voltage Generator with:

Between 2 and 6 Three-Phase Inverter boards...........................................................P/N 9736.01
Between 0 and 3 Inverter Dummy boards ..................................................................P/N 9930.00
One Anode Starter board (either of the following two board options)
• Epsilon Anode Starter board.............................................................................. P/N 9962.xx(1)
• EPS Starter board ................................................................................................P/N 11104.xxx
2. Epsilon Software Package, including:

X-ray Application Software (2)........................................................................................P/N 9809.01
Client I/O Application Software (2) ..............................................................................P/N 9810.01
Options Chip (3)............................................................................................................P/N 11037.xxx
3. Epsilon Operator Console option, including:............................................................P/N 9777.xx
Console Software (4) .........................................................................................................P/N 9811.xx
EPS Console Cable (50-feet)(5) ..................................................................................P/N 10015.000
4. Electronic Documentation (CD), including:...........................................................P/N 10019.xxx
Epsilon PC Tools Software ..........................................................................................P/N 9893.01
X-ray Tube Chart Library ..............................................................................................P/N 9814.01
Operator's Manual...........................................................................................................P/N 9895.xx
Technical Manual ............................................................................................................P/N 9894.00
1. X’s are placeholders for version numbers; item versions might differ according to generator
configuration;
2. Pre-installed on the Controller board; 3. Pre-installed on the Motherboard;
4. Pre-installed on the Console board; 5. Other cable lengths available.

2. Installation
2.1.2 Parts to Be Supplied By Customer

The items below are not provided with the generator and shall be supplied by the customer, if
needed.
1. X-ray Tube One 2-focal spot X-ray tube, Class 1 Type B (IEC Classification)
Two X-ray tubes when the “2-tube option, P/N 10020.000” is fitted
on the generator.
2. High Voltage Cables

a. Ratings : 75 kVp, 100 feet maximum length
Use the same cable type and cable length for both anode and cathode sides
b. Connector types : 3-prong standard Federal connector type

Type ll as per NEMA Standard XR 7-1979 (R 1984, 1990)
c. Cables must comply with US Federal Standard for X-ray cables and receptacles (N° 72)
d. Cables must be equipped with a locking screw to prevent the loosening of the ring nut
without an appropriate tool (IEC 60601-2-7, Clause 15, § aa).
3. ABS/AEC Sensors
i. Ion chamber: AID ICX type compatible
Positive or negative integrating ramp
Active low or active high field selection, from 4 to 24 VDC
Active low or active high integrator reset signal, from 4 to 24 VDC
ii. Photomultiplier tube: Recommended part number 931A/B

With RG-59/U coaxial signal cable
With RG-59/U High-Voltage supply coaxial connector
iii. Photodiode using a RG-59/U coaxial cable
iv. Solid State AEC chamber: Requires LEMO-Plug Type FGG1B.306CLAD62
v. Varian flat panel detector: Recommended part number VIP-9 (Varian Image Processor)
With RG-59/U coaxial signal cable
4. Image Processor for Optional Pulsed Fluoro Image Enhancement Mode

Not supported at present time.

2.2 INTERCONNECTION OVERVIEW
Figure 2.1 – System Interconnection Diagram.

2. Installation
2.3 INSTALLATION SETUP

The Epsilon generator has a very small footprint and requires minimal elbowroom. The question of
its physical location in the X-ray room should not represent difficulties. However, the following few
guidelines will help to secure the physical installation and to provide enough access for the
maintenance of the generator.
Figure 2.2 – High-Voltage Generator Installation Layout (1/2).
1. Should the unit be permanently fixed on a surface or on the floor, you ought to leave the
following minimum clearance space (Figure 2.2):
8.75" on top of the unit, for servicing;
1" minimum elbowroom on each side, for proper ventilation;
No elbowroom necessary on back and front panels, after proper installation is
completed.
For a decorative cabinet option, refer to Technical Manual Supplement

P/N 11050.003 in the electronic documentation CD.

2. Place the Epsilon High-Voltage Generator in a well-ventilated environment. If you have to

confine the generator in a closed cabinet, you should consider equipping the generator with
optional fans. Contact emd technologies service department for more information.
3. The console can be installed up to 100 feet away of the High-Voltage Generator (Section 2.6).
For longer installation setup, contact emd technologies service department.
Figure 2.2 – High-Voltage Generator,

Installation Layout (2/2).
Values between [ ] are in mm
Figure 2.3 – High-Voltage connection section of EPS 45-80 Generator (Line Access Panel removed).
Refer also to Figure 2.4 for details on Line Filter Board.

2. Installation
2.4 POWER LINE CONNECTION
The generator requires a three-phase electric line with a protective earth ground (4 or 5 wires,
maximum wire gauge 0 AWG (50mm)).
Refer to the Power Rating Table (Section 1.2.4, Table 10)

to make sure the power line ratings and electrical safety
requirements are met. =>>
See Table 10,
1. Make sure the mains line is turned off In Section 1.2.4.
at the room circuit breaker.
2. Remove the Line Access Panel at the back of the Epsilon High-Voltage Generator to feed the
line wires through the cable clamp (Figure 2.3).
3. Connect the mains line of the disconnect switch to the Line Filter Board:
J2 (φ1), J3 (φ2), J4 (φ3) and J5 (Neutral) (i) lugs (ii) (Figure 2.4).
(i) For Delta line configuration, leave the neutral lug unconnected.
(ii) Lugs maximum wire gauge: 0 AWG (50 mm2).
4. Connect the main ground of the X-ray room to J1 lug.
Failure to provide a separate earth ground can result

in electrical shock hazard causing injury or death.
5. Firmly attach the wires on the Line Filter Board Holder using cable-ties.
6. Do not turn on the mains power

to the generator at this moment.
Figure 2.4
Line Filter Board
i) Power Line connection
ii) Tube Stator connection
iii) Tube Housing connection
iv) K1/K2 Relay connections
v) F3 & F4 fuses are installed with
Auxiliary Power Supplies option
only.

2.5 X-RAY TUBE CONNECTION
2.5.1 High Voltage Cable Connection

The two (2) high voltage output receptacles are located on the rear section of the High Voltage
Power Supply (Figure 2.3). Each receptacle is identified with a label, "Anode" or "Cathode".
Use the same type and same length of high-voltage cables (see ratings, Section 2.1.2) to connect the
generator anode & cathode outputs to the X-ray tube.
For a Two-tube configuration, refer to Technical Manual Supplement

1. Make sure the mains disconnect switch of the generator is in the

"off" position.
2. Label one of the two High-Voltage cables as "Anode" and the other one as "Cathode".
3. Take off the protective covers of the High-Voltage output on each receptacle. Do not discard them
as they can be used later for shipping.
4. Ensure proper isolation of the High-Voltage receptacles by coating them with insulating grease
or by using a lubricated silicone washer. Isolation is necessary to prevent electric arcs between
the receptacles and the Anode/Cathode modules.
5. Insert the high-voltage cable connector (anode) in the high-voltage receptacle (anode) and make
sure the contact pins are engaged in the holes of the receptacle. Tighten the cable nut while
holding the cable firmly in place. Use an appropriate Allen ranch to tighten the cable ring nut. If
necessary, consult the installation instructions provided by the H.V. cable manufacturer.
6. Repeat step 5 for the cathode High-Voltage cable connector.
7. Attach both high tension cables to the H.V. cable retainers (Figure 2.3) using Tie-wraps.
8. To connect the high tension cables to the X-ray tube, follow the installation procedures
provided by the X-ray tube manufacturer.
2.5.2 Tube Stator Connection

Use a shielded cable to connect the tube stator to the Line Filter board (Table 13 & Figure 2.4).
Connect the shield on both sides of the cable (generator and stator). Feed the stator wires through
the cable clamp seen in Figure 2.3.
Note: According to the type of stator used with the tube, the Anode Starter board will have to be setup
appropriately. This setup is performed in Section 5.1.

2. Installation
Table 13-A Tube stator connection to Line Filter board P/N 9916.x
Usual cable color Signal Connector
Black Stator Main J6 pin 1 – Main T1
White Stator Common J6 pin 2 – Common T1
Green (Red) Stator Phase J6 pin 3 – Phase T1
Bare lug Stator Cable Shield Shield (on Line Filter Board Holder, Figure 2.4)
Table 13-B Tube housing connection to Line Filter board P/N 9916.00
Signal Connector
Tube Housing J8 pin 1 – Tube 1
Tube Housing Return J8 pin 2 – Return 1
Tube Housing Shield Shield (on Line Filter Board Holder, Figure 2.4)
If there is no tube housing safety on your installation, install a jumper in place of

the interlock switch between pins 1 & 2 of J8 connector.
2.5.3 Metal Center Section Connection

If the X-ray tube has a metal center section, it must be
connected to the generator's X-ray ground screw (shield in
Figure 2.4).
2.5.4 Thermal Switch (Tube Housing) Connection

If a thermal switch is present on the tube, it must be connected to the Epsilon’s Line Filter board as
per Table 13-B. A pull-up voltage of +5VDC is present on the input terminals. The interlock input
must be held low (active) to allow the exposure.

2.6 EPSILON OPERATOR CONSOLE INSTALLATION
2.6.1 Console Installation & Connection

1. Install the operator console on a table, on a shelf or on the optional console pedestal.
2. Figure 2.5 below illustrates the back panel of the operator console. Use cable P/N 10015.xxx to
interconnect the Epsilon console (J7) with the generator controller (J4).
RS-232 ( ) and USB ( ) Operator Consoles
Figure 2.5 – Back Panel of Epsilon Operator Console P/N 9777.xx.
3. Use the two swivel leveling mounts on the console base to adjust the visualization
angle for the operator.
This adjustment would be refined later when the operator console will be turned on
for the first time.
No
tes At a later stage of the installation process, the operator console will be used to
setup the generator through a PC compatible computer.

2. Installation
2.6.2 Optional Hand-Switch P/N 10018.xxx

This option provides the operator console with a hand held push-button switch that can be
extended 8 foot from the operator console. The exposure switch can be either used as a replacement
of the operator console’s push-buttons or as an additional exposure switch. This preference is set by
moving a jumper on the console board (§ 2.6.2.2) and can be subject to the national regulation in
place in the country of installation.
2.6.2.1 Hand-Switch Assembly

The hand-switch can be installed on the left or right side of the console (Figure 2.6).
1. Install the hand-switch holder on the hand-switch bracket using the two pairs of lock nuts
and HMS screws n°4 .
2. Unscrew the left or the right swivel leveling mount according to which side the hand-switch will
be installed.
3. Install the hand-switch bracket on the operator console using the swivel leveling mount ,
Sems HMS screw and the two stand-offs .
2.6.2.2 Hand-Switch Connection

1. Connect the hand-switch to J10 connector on the operator console (Figure 2.6).
2. Refer to Section 4.5.2 to enable the hand-switch.
3. Hand-Switch Configuration: The operator console is usually shipped with its PREP/RAD
push-buttons disabled when the Hand-switch is connected.
To enable the console PREP/RAD push-button along with the hand-switch, move the jumper
on the console board P/N 9780.01 from position 2-3 to position 1-2 (Figure 2.7).

Parts shipped or used with Hand-Switch option P/N 10018.000

N° Qty Name Part Number
1 1 Epsilon operator console P/N 9777.xx
2 1 Hand-switch P/N 9787.00
3 1 Hand-switch Console bracket P/N 9788.00
4 2 Swivel leveling mount Part of P/N 9777.xx
5 1 Sems Head machine screw no.10 Part of P/N 10018.xxx
6 2 Stand-off Part of P/N 10018.xxx
7 2 Lock nuts Part of P/N 10018.xxx
8 2 Head machine screw no.4 Part of P/N 10018.xxx
9 1 Hand-switch Holder Part of P/N 10018.xxx
10 1 HD15 Male Connector Part of P/N 9787.00
11 1 Tie Wrap Nylon Part of P/N 10018.001
12 1 MINI DIN 8-Pin Male Connector Part of P/N 10018.001
Operator Console with USB support
Operator Console with RS-232 COM
Figure 2.6 – Hand-Switch connection to Epsilon Operator Console.

2. Installation
Figure 2.7 – PREP/RAD configuration on Console Board P/N 9780.01 (Hand-Switch option).
2.7 SYSTEM GROUNDING
2.7.1 Protective Earth Ground

The protective earth ground provided by the distribution panel must be connected to the chassis
ground lug located on the Line Filter Board (Figure 2.4). This terminal is identified as shown below.
Identification of chassis ground terminal, on Line Filter board. According to this

equipment class, the unit must be referenced to an earth ground by a protective earth conductor. Failure to
provide a separate earth ground can result in electrical shock hazard causing injury or death.
Figure 2.8 – Protective Earth Ground Connection.

2.7.2 System Grounding Configuration

Use the system grounding diagram of Figure 2.9 to make sure no ground loop between the
generator and the client equipment is created.
The Epsilon generator is normally shipped with the 0 VDC of all I/Os tied to the chassis ground of
the generator (Figure 2.9-A) using three (3) ground strap brackets. It is possible that this configuration
can be detrimental to certain peripheral equipment in case of tube arcs.
To isolate the field interface from the generator's chassis ground, undo the ground strap brackets
from the generator (Figure 2.9-B) and connect instead the client I/O system chassis ground to the
generator chassis ground provided on the Field Interfacing section of the Controller.
If the three (3) ground strap brackets are removed from the Controller, it is the client’s
responsibility to wire his main I/O ground to the client's ground studs ( ).
Epsilon High-Voltage Generator

A
CONTROLLER BOARD LFB
(Generator Section)
(Field Interfacing Section)
X-ray Room
F
Central Earth Ground
Ground Strap Installed !

Field Equipment
Field Equipment isolated from
X-ray Room Earth Ground
Figure 2.9a – System Grounding Configurations (1/3).

Field equipment connected to the generator ground (Ground strap installed)

2. Installation
Epsilon High-Voltage Generator

B
CONTROLLER BOARD LFB
(Generator Section)
(Field Interfacing Section)
X-ray Room
F Central Earth Ground
Field Equipment
NO Ground Strap
(To prevent ground loop)
!
Field Equipment connected to
X-ray Room Earth Ground
Figure 2.9b – System Grounding Configurations (2/3).

Field equipment isolated from the generator's ground (Ground strap NOT installed).
3 Chassis Ground Straps
Figure 2.9c – System Grounding Configurations (3/3).

Field Chassis Ground Straps (3 places).

2.8 MECHANICAL ENCLOSURE OF THE GENERATOR
It is recommended to provide the installed generator with mechanical enclosure to afford better
electrical security to the personnel. This step can be done using the Decorative Cabinet
P/N 10017.001 option.
Installation Note:
Final enclosure of the generator should be done at the end of the installation procedure only. It is
therefore better to postpone the final enclosure of the EPS generator after the Field-Calibration
procedure (Chapter 5) or the User Acceptance tests (Chapter 6) are performed. Refer also to Figure
1.7 for the decorative cabinet dimensions and different cable access configurations.
Figure 2.10 – Optional Decorative Cabinet P/N 10017.001.
For more information, refer to “Decorative Cabinet Option, Technical Manual

Supplement, P/N 11050.003” in the electronic documentation CD.

3.0 INTERFACING
IN THIS CHAPTER :
3.1 SIGNAL INTERFACING TABLES ..........................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.1 Controller Board P/N 9798.01 ..................................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.2 Line Filter Board P/N 9916.00-.01 ...........................................................................................................................................................3-8
3.1.3 Optional Boards ...........................................................................................................................................................................................3-9
3.1.3.1 Fluoro PMT Board P/N 9822.00 .......................................................................................................................................................3-9
3.1.3.2 Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro Board P/N 11030.000............................................................................................................ 3-11
3.1.3.3 Relay Expansion Board P/N 9932.00............................................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.1.3.4 Tube Switch Interface board P/N 9996.00.................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.1.3.5 Universal Chambers Interface Board P/N 11002.000.................................................................................................................. 3-14
3.1.3.6 Auxiliary Power Supplies P/N 10023.001 & 10023.002 .............................................................................................................. 3-14
3.1.3.7 CPX Adapter Board P/N 9990.00 .................................................................................................................................................. 3-15
3.2 EXPOSURE SWITCHES........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.2.1 Exposure Switches .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.2.2 Hand-Switch Option ................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-15
3.3 EXPOSURE TRIGGERS........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.4 PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL INPUTS ............................................................................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.1 General........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-19
3.4.1.1 Programmable Input Types .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-19
3.4.1.2 Selectable Voltage Threshold ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.1.3 Inputs with Terminated Resistor ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.4.2 RAD & Fluoro Interlocks........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-21
3.4.3 RAD/Fluoro Frame Rate Selection ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.4.4 AEC/Fluoro Lock Mode Input Type.................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.5 AEC Reset Input Type............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.4.6 Fluoro Alarm Reset Input Type.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.5.1 Digital Outputs Specification .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-26
Optional Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro Board............................................................................................................................ 3-27
3.5.2 Types of Programmable Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-27
3.5.2.1 Programmable Client Outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.5.2.2 “Alarm” Output Type ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.5.2.3 “X-ray On” Output Type.................................................................................................................................................................. 3-29
3.5.2.4 Frame Rate Output Type .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-29
3.5.2.5 Heat Units Over n % Output........................................................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.5.2.6 Operator Console Function Keys.................................................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.5.3 Fast Digital Outputs ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.5.4 Relay Contacts ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.5.4.1 Power ON “K1” Relay Output (Line Filter Board)...................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.5.4.2 Programmable Relay Output (Line Filter Board) .......................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.5.4.3 Relay Expansion Board ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.6 AEC MODE INTERFACE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.6.1 AEC Chambers Interfacing ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.6.1.1 Ion Chambers ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.6.1.2 Solid State AEC Chambers............................................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.6.2 PMT or Photodiode Interfacing ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-35
3.6.3 Remote Analog Signal/ Flat Panel Interfacing ..................................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.6.4 SPD Dose Tracking Interface (Optional Feature) ............................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.7 FLUORO INTERFACE............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-36
3.7.1 Image Intensifier Pickup Device............................................................................................................................................................. 3-36
3.7.2 Trigger (Pulsed Fluoro) ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-38
3.7.3 Fluoro Footswitch & Interlocks ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-38
3.7.4 External Control for Fluoro Dose Stabilization................................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.8 COMMUNICATION PORTS................................................................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.8.1 Communication with a Computer.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.8.2 Communication with an External Console ........................................................................................................................................... 3-40

The interface of the peripheral equipment with the Epsilon generator is done on the Controller
board and optional expansion boards (Figure 3.1).
No
tes
Most signals are site-dependent and require software configuration using the
Epsilon PC Tools program (Chapter 4).
Figure 3.1 – Epsilon RF Generator’s principal interfacing points.
Do not connect signals to the generator when power is applied.
Typically, digital I/Os :

Are active low diode isolated inputs.
Are open collector output switches to system DC return. Active low, they get true in the
sense of the signal names when the current flows from the output terminal to the generator
DC return. Maximum current in on-state: 100 mA.
Maximum voltage in off-state: 30 V.
Must be shielded: All signal cables connected to the generator must be shielded. We
recommend connecting the client signal shields to the appropriate chassis ground lugs on the
client section of the Controller board and/or on the optional boards (Figure 3.1, “Signal
shield lugs”).

3. Interfacing
3.1 SIGNAL INTERFACING TABLES
The following tables can be used for quick interfacing references.
3.1.1 Controller Board P/N 9798.01
Table 14- J14 Connector - P/N 9798.01

Signal Name Pin Description Refer to
Voltage reference for input threshold: +5V or +12V
VTH 1 § 3.4.1.2
Do not use this voltage as an external voltage supply.
Progr. input IP4 2 Programmable inputs using Epsilon PC Tools program
Progr. input IP3 3
§ 3.4
Progr. input IP2 4
Progr. input IP1 5
Configurable synchronization of exposure start and/or
Trigger input # 1 6 § 3.3
exposure stop
Progr. output 1 7 Programmable outputs using Epsilon PC Tools program
Progr. output 2 8 § 3.5.2.1
Progr. output 3 9
Analog signal for interfacing an ABS control device, typically
Remote AEC /
10 a flat panel, or other delayed feedback device. § 3.7.4
SPD Tracking
Can be used also for SPD tracking.
+24VDC 11 Client voltage supply (100 mA max) Fig. 3.7
Ground 12 Digital signal return ---


Signal Name Pin Description : Footswitch Interface Refer to
When low, prep is initiated if “footswitch enabled” is set
PREP switch 1
from the CPU.
When low, RAD is initiated if “footswitch enabled” is set
RAD switch 2 from the CPU and all prerequisite conditions are validated: § 3.2.1
Prep active, optional interlock(s) and rotor are OK.
Return signal for Prep & RAD switches. The presence of the
Footswitch
3 common is conditional to the “Footswitch enabled” signal
Common
from the CPU.

Voltage reference for input threshold: +5V or +12V
VTH A1 § 3.4.1.2
Do not use this voltage as an external voltage supply.
Progr. input IP10 A2 Programmable inputs using Epsilon PC Tools program
Progr. input IP9 A3
Progr. input IP8 A4
§ 3.4
Progr. input IP7 A5
Progr. input IP6 B2
Progr. input IP5 B3
Trigger input #2 A6 § 3.3
exposure stop
Progr. output 4 A7 Programmable outputs using Epsilon PC Tools program
Progr. output 5 A8
Progr. output 6 B1
§ 3.5.2.1
Progr. output 7 B5
Progr. output 8 B6
Ground B4 0 VDC
EIP B7 Programmable timing fast output § 3.5.3.2
Main gate output B8 Is low during X-ray on § 3.5.3.1

3. Interfacing
Table 17- J13 & J8 Connectors - P/N 9798.01

Signal Name Pin Description: Ion Chambers # 1 (J13) and # 2 (J8) Refer to
Integrator feedback 1 Positive or negative integrating ramp from 0 V to ± 10V DC
Field Select A 2 Low or high active signal
(0V DC or V OUT High active).
Field Select B 3 § 3.6.1
Field Select C 4
&
Integrator reset 5 Low or high active signal (0V DC or V OUT High active).
§ 5.7.1
+ 12 VDC 6 Positive power supply (Max. output current 100 mA)
0 VDC 7
– 12 VDC 8 Negative power supply (Max. output current 25 mA)

Description: To Epsilon Operator Console,
Signal Name Pin
using Console cable P/N 10015.xxx
+ 24V DC 1 For use with Epsilon Operator Console only.
CAN H 2 CAN bus interface signal
GND 3, 4 Ground
N.U. 5, 6, 7 N.C.
Power on/off
8 The line is isolated from other console signal lines
Common
Footswitch Console 9 Safety signal (independent from serial interface);

Common Enabled Exposure is allowed only when this pin is grounded via “Console Common
Enabled” set from CPU (bit activated thru Epsilon PC Tools configuration)
CAN L 10 CAN bus interface signal
GND 11, 12 Ground
N.U. 13, 14 N.C.

15 Signal with different logic levels is sent via this line when one of power
Power On/Off
buttons is pressed. Status of the buttons is analyzed by the generator CPU.
Contact
The line is isolated from other console signal lines.


Description: CAN BUS serial port for secondary console
Signal Name Pin
communication or biplane system (emd purposes only)
+ 24V DC 1 For use with Epsilon Operator Console only.
CAN H 2 CAN bus interface signal.

GND 3, 4 Ground
10 kΩ to + 24 VDC 5 Epsilon biplane master: power output.
N.U. 6, 7, 8 N.C.
Footswitch Console Safety signal (independent from serial interface)

Common Enabled Exposure is allowed only when this pin is grounded via “Console
9
Common Enabled” set from CPU (bit activated thru Epsilon PC Tools
configuration)
CAN L 10 CAN bus interface signal.
GND 11, 12 Ground
RPWR+ 13 Epsilon biplane slave: power output.
N.U. 14, 15 N.C.

Signal Name Pin Description
Ground 1, 9 Generator serial port used for connecting a PC in order to configure the
generator using Epsilon PC Tools program. Signals comply with RS-232
TX 2 specifications. Refer to § 3.8.1.
RX 3 Baud rate: 57, 600
DTR 4
Ground 5, 6
RTS 7
CTS 8

3. Interfacing

Ground 1, 9
Generator serial port available for communication with an external
TX 2 console using a proprietary protocol. Signals comply with RS-232
RX 3 specifications.
N.U. 4 Needs generator power on/off signals (see J6 connector, next § 3.8.2
Table).
Ground 5, 6
Baud rate: Defaulted to 19, 200 (Configurable in PC Tools)
RTS 7
330Ω to 12 V 8

Ground to external console. The wire is connected with cathode of
0 VDC 1
generator optocoupler.
Power on/off 2 Application of +5 VDC to +12 VDC turns the Epsilon generator § 3.8.2
power on.
Application of +0 VDC to +1 VDC turns the Epsilon generator
power off. Current requirement: approximately 1 mA.

+ 5 VDC 1 Selects threshold voltage for digital inputs.
The voltage switching threshold is ½ the reference voltage.
V REF.. 2 § 3.4.1.2
Default position: Positions 1-2 jumped
+12 VDC 3

3.1.2 Line Filter Board P/N 9916.00-.01
Table 24- J7 Connector - P/N 9916.00/.01

Relay Pin Description Refer to
K1 3, 4 Generator Power-on relay § 3.5.4.1
K2 1, 2 Programmable relay output § 3.5.4.2

Signal Name Pin Description: Tube Stator Connection Refer to
Stator Main Tube 1 1 Tube # 1 Stator connection
Stator Common 1 2
Stator Phase Tube 1 3
§ 2.5.2
Stator Main Tube 2 4 Tube # 2 Stator connection
Stator Common 2 5
Stator Phase Tube 2 6

3. Interfacing

Signal Name Pin Description: Tube Housing Interlock Connection Refer to
Tube 1 Housing 1 A pull-up voltage of +5VDC is present on the input
terminals. The interlock input must be held low
Tube 1 Housing Return 2 (active) to allow the exposure on tube # 1.
§ 2.5.2
Tube 2 Housing 3 A pull-up voltage of +5VDC is present on the input
terminals. The interlock input must be held low
Tube 2 Housing Return 4 (active) to allow the exposure on tube # 2.
3.1.3 Optional Boards
3.1.3.1 Fluoro PMT Board P/N 9822.00
Table 27- J1 Connector – 9822.00

Signal Name Pin Description (RG-59/U coaxial, BNC terminated) Refer to
PMT High Voltage supply 1 High voltage supply for the phototube § 3.7.1
Ground 2 0 VDC

Signal Name Pin Description: Additional footswitches Refer to
Prep Switch 1 When low, prep is initiated in the selected workstation
When low, RAD is initiated in the selected workstation if
RAD Switch 2 all prerequisite conditions are validated :
Prep active, interlock(s) and rotor are OK
§ 3.2.1
Fluoro High Level 3 Low for Fluoro High level
Fluoro Low Level 4 Low for Fluoro Low level

Footswitch common 5 thru 8 Return signal for the four exposure switches


Signal Name Pin Description: Fluoro Interfacing Refer to
+5V or +12VDC, as per J9 jumper position;
VTH A1 § 3.4.1.2
Results in a threshold voltage of + 2.5 or + 6 VDC.
Progr. input IP11 A2 Programmable inputs using the Epsilon PC Tools generator
setup program.
Progr. input IP12 A3
§ 3.4
Trigger #4 input A6 § 3.3
exposure stop.
Progr. output L4 A7 Programmable outputs using the Epsilon PC Tools
generator setup program.
Progr. output L3 A8
§ 3.5.2.1
Progr. output L2 B1
Progr. output L1 B5
Not used in this generator version. Contact emd
Analog Input #1 B2 --
technologies for possible application
External H.V. 0-10 VDC: Optional analog input used for external control of
B3 § 3.7.4
Control Input stabilized dose.
Ground B4 0 VDC
VME B6 Image system timing signal (Not used). ---
EIP B7 Image system timing signal (Not used). ---
OUTW B8 Programmable timing fast output (Not used). ---

Signal Name Pin Description (RG-59/U coaxial, BNC terminated) Refer to
Phototube feedback input 1 Analog input used for control of stabilized dose (or AEC)
§ 3.7.1
Ground 2 0 VDC

3. Interfacing
3.1.3.2 Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro Board P/N 11030.000
Table 31- J1 Connector - 11030.000

Signal Name Pin Description: Additional footswitch Refer to
Prep Switch 1 When low, prep is initiated in the selected workstation
When low, RAD is initiated in the selected workstation if all
RAD Switch 2 prerequisite conditions are validated : § 3.2.1
Prep active, interlock(s) and rotor are OK
Footswitch common 3 Return signal for the exposure switch

Signal Name Pin Description: Additional footswitch Refer to
Fluoro High Level 1 Low for Fluoro High level
Fluoro Low Level 2 Low for Fluoro Low level § 3.2.1
Footswitch common 3 Return signal for Fluoro switch

Signal Name Pin Description: Fluoro Interfacing Refer to
Progr. input IP11 1 Programmable inputs using the Epsilon PC Tools generator
setup program. § 3.4
Progr. input IP12 2
Trigger #4 input 3 § 3.3
exposure stop.
Progr. output 1 4 Programmable outputs using the Epsilon PC Tools
generator setup program. § 3.5.2
Progr. output 2 5
EIP 6 Image system timing signal (Not used). ---
VME 7 Image system timing signal (Not used). ---
Ground 8 0 VDC


Signal Name Pin Description (RG-59/U coaxial) Refer to
ABS/AEC Analog input used for control of stabilized dose § 3.7.1
1
Feedback input
Ground 2 0 VDC
Table 35- J4 & J5 Connectors - 11030.000

Signal Name Pin Description: Ion Chambers # 8 (J5) and # 9 (J4) Refer to
Integrator feedback 1 Positive or negative integrating ramp from 0 V to ±10V DC
Field Select A 2 Low or high active signal
(0V DC or V OUT High active).
Field Select B 3 § 3.6.1
Field Select C 4
&
Integrator reset 5 Low or high active signal (0V DC or V OUT High active).
§ 5.7
+ 12 VDC 6 Positive power supply
Ground 7 0 VDC
– 12 VDC 8 Negative power supply
Connector J8: Leave jumper in position 1-2
Connector J10: Jumper in position 1-2: Normal gain for photodiode

Jumper in position 2-3: Low gain for photodiode (Slow ramp ABS)

3. Interfacing
3.1.3.3 Relay Expansion Board P/N 9932.00
Table 36- Relay Expansion Board Contacts

Relay Pin Description: Programmable Relays (refer to Section 3.5.4.3) Pin Relay
J1-1 Normally open contact J3-1
K1 J1-2 Common contact J3-2 K5
J1-3 Normally closed contact J3-3
3.1.3.4 Tube Switch Interface board P/N 9996.00
Connector J1 (RJ45 Connector):

Motor switch & Interlock signals to Tube
Switch Box Assembly P/N 11024.000
Connector J2:
Future expansion
Connector J3:
To Expansion Motherboard P/N 9824.00

3.1.3.5 Universal Chambers Interface Board P/N 11002.000

Signal Name Pin Description: Interface for Ion Chamber # 3 Refer to
Integrator feedback 1 Positive integrating ramp from 0 V to + 10V DC
Field Select A 2 Open drain, active low signals
Field Select B 3 § 3.6.1.1
Field Select C 4
&
Integrator reset 5
§ 5.7
+ 12 VDC 6 Positive power supply
0 VDC 7 Ground
– 12 VDC 8 Negative power supply
Table 38- J3/J4/J5 Connectors – 11002.000

Lemo Connector Solid State Ion Chamber Number Refer to
J3 Solid State AEC Chamber # 4
J4 Solid State AEC Chamber # 5 § 3.6.1.2
J5 Solid State AEC Chamber # 6 &
Low-level input current integrated into voltage for accurate feedback § 5.7
measurement AEC solid state chambers.
Use LEMO-Plug Type FGG1B.306CLAD62 to make connections.
3.1.3.6 Auxiliary Power Supplies P/N 10023.001 & 10023.002

• 24 VDC, maximum current: 2.7 A • 24 VAC, maximum current: 6.25 A
For “Auxiliary Power Supplies Option”, refer to Technical Manual Supplement

P/N 11050.000 or P/N 11050.013 in the electronic documentation CD.

3. Interfacing
3.1.3.7 CPX Adapter Board P/N 9990.00
For “CPX Adapter Board option”, refer to Technical Manual Supplement

3.2 EXPOSURE SWITCHES
The tube loading is requested by the activation of an exposure switch. After the exposure switch
gets activated, the generator will load the X-ray tube only if specific safety conditions are met (no
fault, interlock is ok, tube is ok, etc).
It is not possible to perform successive loadings of the tube without releasing first the exposure
switch between each tube single loading (single RAD) or sequential loading (serial RAD).
3.2.1 Exposure Switches

PREP & RAD Switches: Instead of using the PREP/Expose push-buttons on the operator
console, the client can interface one or two (on RF configuration) other sets of exposure switches to
activate an exposure from a remote location (Figure 3.2 & Table 39). The selection of the
appropriate set of exposure switch for a given workstation is done through the generator setup
process (Chapter 4).
Fluoro Switches: Two Fluoro switch inputs are provided on the Fluoro boards (PMT or PhD),
Low & High Fluoro levels (Figure 3.2). When either Fluoro input comes low, Fluoro imaging starts
if all prerequisite conditions are acknowledged (optional interlock, Filament current and trigger in
Pulsed Fluoro). Both levels have their own Fluoro entrance exposure rate (Section 5.4) and dose
stabilization control (Section 5.5).
Note: Prep and RAD switches have priority over Fluoro footswitch.
Exposure Switch Ground: Exposure is allowed only when the exposure footswitch common signal
(J12 pin 3 or J2 pin 5, etc) is grounded via “Console Common Enabled” set from CPU (bit activated
thru Epsilon PC Tools configuration).
3.2.2 Hand-Switch Option

Hand-switch P/N 10018.000 connects to the console using a DB15 male connector.
Hand-switch P/N 10018.001 connects to the console using a Mini DIN 8-Pin male connector.
Refer to Section 2.6.2.

Figure 3.2 – Exposure Switch Interface.
Table 39- Exposure Switches Interface

Board part number Gray = Optional connectors
PHD PMT
Signal Name 9798.01 Description
11030.000 9822.00
When low, prep is initiated if “footswitch enabled” is
PREP switch J1-1 J2-1 J12-1
set from the CPU.
When low, RAD is initiated if “footswitch enabled” is
set from the CPU and all prerequisite conditions are
RAD switch J1-2 J2-2 J12-2
validated: Prep active, optional interlock(s) and rotor
are OK.
Return signal for Prep & RAD switches. The presence
Footswitch
J1-3 J2-5 J12-3 of the common is conditional to the “Footswitch
common
enabled” signal from the CPU.

3. Interfacing
Table 40- Fluoro Switch Interface

Board part number Gray = Optional connectors
PHD PMT
Signal Name Description
11030.000 9822.00
Fluoro High Level J2-1 J2-3 Low for Fluoro High level
Fluoro Low Level J2-2 J2-4 Low for Fluoro Low level
Footswitch common J2-3 J2-5 Return signal for the Fluoro switch
3.3 EXPOSURE TRIGGERS

The generator provides 2 RAD trigger inputs (J14 & J15, pin 6 in Figure 3.3a) and one trigger input
for Fluoro to synchronize the exposure with the peripheral equipment. The trigger pulse width must
be > 250 µs. The activation voltage depends on VTH (Section 3.4.1.2).
To assign the proper trigger input and configure its activation level for a given workstation, use the
Epsilon PC Tools Program (Section 4.5 for RAD & Section 4.6 for Fluoro). Refer to Figure 3.3b
for different types of trigger activation.
Notes: 1. Utilization of a trigger in RAD is mandatory in serial radiography only.

2. Refer to Section 3.7 for Fluoro trigger.
Figure 3.3a – RAD Trigger Interfacing.

Figure 3.3 b– Different types of RAD trigger activation.

3. Interfacing
3.4 PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL INPUTS
3.4.1 General
3.4.1.1 Programmable Input Types
The connection points shown in Table 41 are available inputs to interface the X-ray room with the
generator. Every digital signal can be set up as one of the following input types using the Epsilon
PC Tools program (=> Chapter 4):
1. Interlock (§ 3.4.2); 5. Fluoro Alarm Reset (§ 3.4.6);
2. Frame Rate input (§ 3.4.3); 6. Workstation Select (*);
3. AEC/Fluoro Lock Mode (§ 3.4.4); 7. Exam Select (*);
4. AEC Reset (§ 3.4.5); 8. I. I. Magnification inputs (**).
(*) Workstation & Exam Select inputs are dedicated to CBCT mode and shall
not be used otherwise. Refer to Technical Manual Supplement
(**) I.I. Magnification inputs are used only on generators with High
Performance Pulsed Fluoro. Refer to Technical Manual Supplement
The programmable inputs are described in the next sections.
3.4.1.2 Selectable Voltage Threshold

VTH Threshold Voltage Reference A pull-up voltage of +5VDC or +12VDC can be conveyed to the
input terminals for reference.
J9- pins 1 and 2 jumped = + 5 Volts
J9- pins 2 and 3 jumped = + 12 Volts
The input threshold value will then be half the value of the reference (VTH = V REF/2). The selected
voltage is present as a reference on J14 between pins 1 & 14 and J15 between pins A1 and B4.
Refer to Table 41 for diagram. Do not use this voltage as an external voltage supply.

Table 41- List of Programmable Digital Inputs

Connector Pin Typical Interfacing Description
2
Active low inputs programmable for different generator modes using the
J14 3 Epsilon PC Tools program. Refer to Chapter 4.
Controller board 4
5
A2
A3
J15 A4
Controller board A5
B2
B3
A2
J3 A3
Fluoro PMT board Input is inactive when: VInput > VThreshold
A4 Input is active when: VInput < ½ x VThreshold
A5 Maximum 30 VDC
1 Programmable inputs (with terminated resistor) for different generator
Board 11030.000 modes using the Epsilon PC Tools program. Refer to Chapter 4.
J3 connector
2 Maximum voltage at input equals to or less than VTermination
3.4.1.3 Inputs with Terminated Resistor
• On optional Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro P/N 11030.000 only.

• Active low or active high
• VTERMINATION programmable from 4 VDC to 24 VDC, using Epsilon PC Tools
Figure 3.4 – Programmable Inputs on Photodiode Fluoro board P/N 11030.000.

3. Interfacing
3.4.2 RAD & Fluoro Interlocks

Interlock type inputs are provided as security mechanism for RAD and Fluoro (Figure 3.5).
The location, number and names of interlocks can differ from the one shown
above using the Epsilon PC Tools program (=> Chapter 4).
Figure 3.5 – Typical Interlock Interfacing.
For a given workstation, the interlock can be of 3 different types, each one corresponding to a
specific generator state described in Table 42. The generator will validate each interlock at a different
time during the exposure process, as depicted in Figure 3.6. Refer to Chapter 4 to program the
interlock inputs.
Table 42- Interlock Types Description

Interlock Types| Applications/Functions
Ready The generator requires that the interlock be true before toggling from Prep to ready mode.
The interlock is verified during PREP only.
Start The generator requires that the interlock be true before toggling to main gate state. The
interlock signal is verified during the generator's Prep and Ready states.
X-ray The generator requires that the interlock be true before toggling to main gate state. Also, in
multiple exposures, the interlock must stay true (low) for the duration of the exposure.

Figure 3.6 (1/2) — Interlock Ready & Start shown in a serial RAD exposure.

3. Interfacing
Figure 3.6 (2/2) — Interlock “X-RAY” shown in a RAD & Fluoro.

3.4.3 RAD/Fluoro Frame Rate Selection

RAD and Pulsed Fluoro exposure rate can be selected either at the console or from the peripheral
equipment using up to three (3) programmable inputs (Figure 3.7 and Table 43).
• The frame rate selection for RAD and Fluoro can either use the same lines or instead use a
distinct set of inputs. See Chapter 4, System Setup.
• When remote frame rate selection is enabled, RAD and Fluoro are done at the operator
console's selection when, and only when, all frame rate selection lines are left open.
Figure 3.7 – Typical Frame Rate Selection Inputs Interfacing.
Table 43- Frame Rate Remote Selection Table

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Frame Rate Operation
Open Open Open Console Selection
x x x See Section 4.5.2 to program the frame rate selection

3. Interfacing
3.4.4 AEC/Fluoro Lock Mode Input Type

This active low signal works in AEC serial technique and in Fluoro.
In AEC serial exposure (RAD), the first frame is done using the AEC feedback. The Lock input is
sampled at the end of each exposure:
• If false, the next exposure is performed in AEC mode;
• If true, the next exposure is performed at the latest measured mAs parameters.
In automatic Fluoro (ABS), kV/mA corrections are considered after each exposure pulse (Pulsed
Fluoro) or after every time interval (Continuous Fluoro). At each correction time, the following
conditions might produce one of the following actions.
1. Lock Input is false

The generator clears the lock mode and corrections are made normally. The Fluoro High or
Low level pedals are scanned to determine the active Fluoro level.
2. Lock Input is true, Lock mode not set yet

The generator will set the Lock mode (active) at the arrival of any of the following conditions,
inasmuch as the lock input remains true:
i) No kV correction by the kV/mA correction algorithm for two consecutive pulses;
ii) Occurrence of kV minimum or kV maximum;
iii) Six consecutive calculations returning a kV change;
The Fluoro level (High or Low) is saved when the generator enters the Lock Mode. Therefore,
the pedals are ignored, until the next Fluoro run.
3. Lock Input is true, Lock Mode already set

In lock mode no changes are made to kV, mA or mAs per pulse. Live pedal changes from/to
Fluoro High Level to/from Fluoro Low Level are ignored.
4. Idle Mode
When the same Fluoro level is selected from Idle Mode that was just previously locked and the
Lock Input is still true, the generator continues with the same locked parameters. Selecting the
other Fluoro level starts the Fluoro sequence as in condition 2 above.
3.4.5 AEC Reset Input Type

A falling edge activation of this input will reset a backup time fault in AEC mode. It has no impact
at any other moment.
3.4.6 Fluoro Alarm Reset Input Type

A falling edge activation of this type of input during Fluoro will reset the Fluoro alarm. It has no
impact at any other moment.

3.5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
3.5.1 Digital Outputs Specification

Digital output connection points shown in Tables 44 & 45 are available for interfacing purposes.
Table 44- Digital Outputs Specification

J7 1-2 Programmable relay contacts (=> Section 3.5.4.2)

Line Filter Board
3-4 Power On relay (=> Section 3.5.4.1)
J1 and J3 Optional relays (=> Section 3.5.4.3)
1 thru 12
Relay Expansion Board
11 + 24 VDC (100 mA max)
J14 7 Open drain outputs programmable using the Epsilon PC

Controller board Tools program; Refer to Chapter 4.
8
A7
J15 A8
Controller board
B1
B5, B6
A7
J3 Fluoro PMT A8
Board (Option) B1
B5 24 VDC / 100 mA open drain specifications

Fluoro PhD board
Refer to Table 45.
(Option)

3. Interfacing
Optional Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro Board

The optional Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro P/N 11030.000 provides 2 programmable outputs
with selectable polarity and voltage level (Table 45).
Table 45- Selectable Polarity & Voltage on Programmable Outputs - P/N 11030.000
4 Outputs can be active low or high (selectable polarity), and the voltage
J3 value of the output at high level is programmable from 4 to 24 V. This is
5 done using the Epsilon PC Tools program, as described in Chapter 4.
3.5.2 Types of Programmable Outputs

Using the Epsilon PC Tools program, every digital output can be programmed to be active during
specific generator conditions:
1. Client Programmable outputs (§ 3.5.2.1); 5. Heat Units Output (§ 3.5.2.5);
2. X-ray On Alarm (§ 3.5.2.2); 6. Operator Console Function keys (§ 3.5.2.6);
3. X-ray On signal (§ 3.5.2.3); 7. I. I. Magnification outputs (*).
4. Frame Rate output bit “n” (§ 3.5.2.4);
(*) I.I. Magnification outputs are used only on generators with High
Performance Pulsed Fluoro. Refer to Technical Manual Supplement

3.5.2.1 Programmable Client Outputs

Programmable client outputs can be used individually or in any combination as general purpose
control lines in RAD, Fluoro or during generator fault condition. For example, they can be
connected to activate optocoupled isolators or relay coils. During RAD, an output line could be
activated (pulled down) in any of five (5) generator states: Idle, Prep, Ready, Run and Run-X. In
Fluoro, the output lines can be activated independently during Low and High Fluoro levels. These
lines are described in Programmable Inputs Configuration, Section 4.5.2.
The generator’s Ready State is used to interface the acquisition system
Figure 3.8 – Typical Programmable Client Field Output Interfacing Diagram.
3.5.2.2 “Alarm” Output Type

The Alarm output type can be used to connect an external buzzer in the X-ray room (Figure 3.9). In
this condition, the state of the output follows the built-in buzzer of the Epsilon operator console.
The minimum on-time for the alarm line is 250 ms.
Figure 3.9 – Typical Alarm (Buzzer) Interfacing Diagram.

3. Interfacing
3.5.2.3 “X-ray On” Output Type

This active low output (Figure 3.10) turns on during the production of X-rays. It has a minimum on-
time of 250 ms; therefore, if an exposure pulses at a frequency equals to or greater than 4 Hz, the
signal remains active for the exposure duration time. This output is not as accurate as the Main Gate signal
(Section 3.5.3.1) since it is not in complete synchronicity with the exposure all the times.
Figure 3.10 – Typical X-ray On and Main Gate signals Interfacing Diagram.
3.5.2.4 Frame Rate Output Type

Three (3) outputs can be used to provide the external world with real time knowledge of the current
frame rate in RAD and (Pulsed) Fluoro.
Table 46- Selected Frame Rate Outputs RAD/Pulsed Fluoro

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Selected Frame Rate
Open Open Open N.U.
Refer to Section 4.5.2 to code the frame rate bits.
3.5.2.5 Heat Units Over n % Output

This output turns on whenever the utilized tube heat units reach a certain percentage. The output
returns off when the tube cools down below that same H.U. amount.

3.5.2.6 Operator Console Function Keys

An active low output can be associated with a function key on the Epsilon console (Figure 3.11).
The Function keys can be set to be active in Toggle or Momentary mode (Section 4.5.2).
Figure 3.11 – Momentary output activation associated to a F1 key on the Epsilon operator console.
3.5.3 Fast Digital Output

Main Gate Output: This open drain output (J15, pin B8) can be used as an inverted X-ray On
signal in RAD mode (output goes low whenever X-rays are produced at the X-ray tube). The signal
follows accurately the exposure, but is however inverted. Refer to Figure 3.10.

3. Interfacing
3.5.4 Relay Contacts

3.5.4.1 Power ON “K1” Relay Output (Line Filter Board)
Contacts for a power-on relay (K1) are provided on Line Filter Board, J7 pins 3 & 4. The relay’s
contacts (20A- 250V) are energized whenever the generator is turned on (Figure 3.12).
These contacts are not available with the optional Auxiliary Power
Supplies P/N 10023.000. If this option is fitted on the generator,
refer to Technical Manual Supplement P/N 11050.000 or
3.5.4.2 Programmable Relay Output (Line Filter Board)

A programmable relay (K2) is provided on Line Filter Board P/N 9916.00, with contact pins shown
in Figure 3.12 (contacts 20A-250V). Refer to Section 4.5.2 to program the activation of the relay.
+ 24 V K1A
4
K1B 3
2
K2B 1
K2A
J7
K2 Progr. Out
Figure 3.12 – Line Filter Relay Contacts on J7 connector.
3.5.4.3 Relay Expansion Board

The Relay Expansion Board P/N 9932.00 consists of a set of 8 user-programmable relays that can
be activated as a function of the different generator states, using the Epsilon PC Tools program.
Each electrically insulated relay contact can sink up to 10 Amps with 240 VAC.
The relays can be used as general purpose control lines. They are activated independently by the
programmable outputs of the generator; the status of each relay is thus dependent upon the various
operating conditions of the generator (such as IDLE, PREP, READY or FLUORO; see "Output
Configuration", Section 4.5.2).

+ 24 V
K1B
K1A
K1 Progr. Out
1 K1 N.O.
2 K1 Common
3 K1 N.C.
K2B K2A 4
K2 N.O.
K2 Progr. Out 5
K2 Common
6
K2 N.C.
7 K3 N.O.
8 K3 Common
K3B 9 K3 N.C.
10
K3 Progr. Out K3A K4 N.O.
11
K4 Common
12 K4 N.C.
J1
K4B
K4A
K4 Progr. Out
K5B
K5 Progr. Out K5A
1 K5 N.O.
K6B 2 K5 Common
K6A
K6 Progr. Out 3 K5 N.C.
4 K6 N.O.
5 K6 Common
6 K6 N.C.
7 K7 N.O.
8 K7 Common
K7B 9 K7 N.C.
K7A 10
K7 Progr. Out K8 N.O.
11 K8 Common
12 K8 N.C.
J3
K8B
K8A
K8 Progr. Out
Figure 3.13 – Relay Expansion Board P/N 9932.00.

3. Interfacing
3.6 AEC MODE INTERFACE
3.6.1 AEC Chambers Interfacing

3.6.1.1 Ion Chambers
Two ionization chambers can be interfaced on Controller board P/N 9798.01 on J8 (chamber #1)
and J13 (chamber #2) connectors. Three Field Select inputs (A, B, and C; [or Left, Center and Right])
are provided for each ion chamber. At least one of them must be
connected for an ion chamber to be functional.
The connected fields shall be enabled in the workstation setup
using the Epsilon PC Tools program (Section 4.5). Other ion
chambers are provided on optional boards, using the same
interfacing signals and pin-out). Ion Chamber setup in PC Tools
Notes:
1. The ion chamber feedback signal (pin 1) can ramp from 0 VDC up to (±) 10 VDC.
2. It is highly recommended that the ion chamber be electrically isolated from the chassis.
3. V High is set in Epsilon PC Tools: 4 VDC < VHIGH < 24 VDC.
4. Available ionization chambers are:
i. Controller board P/N 9798.01: Ion chambers # 1 and 2, J13 & J8 connectors;
ii. Universal Chambers Interface board P/N 11002.000
• Ion chamber # 3, J1 connector;
• Solid State A.E.C. chambers: Solid State Chambers # 4, 5 and 6; see Section 3.6.1.2.
iii. CPX Adaptor board P/N 9990.00: Ion chamber # 7, J101 connector;
iv. Photodiode Ion Ch. Fluoro board P/N 11030.000: Ion chambers # 8 and 9, J5 & J4 connectors
Figure 3.14 – Ion Chamber Interfacing Diagram.

1. Refer to Figure 3.14 to connect the ion chamber on the Controller (or optional board).
2. Using the Epsilon PC tools, select the activation polarity of the field select signal and integrator
reset signal (independent settings). Refer to Section 5.7.1 to setup the fields and integrator
reset signals as per the manufacturer specifications.
3. Refer to Section 5.7.2 to fine-tune the AEC using the film-screen correction tables and the gain
of the AEC feedback signal.
3.6.1.2 Solid State AEC Chambers

The optional Universal Chambers Interface board P/N 11002.000 is a precision integrating amplifier
board that integrates low-level input current provided by solid state AEC chambers (Figure 3.15).
The board stores the resulting voltage for accurate feedback measurement. Using integrating
capacitors, up to three field inputs can be summed up (Field A, B and C). The input signal current
can be positive or negative.
Figure 3.15 – Optional Solid State AEC Chambers Interface.

3. Interfacing
3.6.2 PMT or Photodiode Interfacing

A photomultiplier tube or photodiode can be used to control AEC exposures. Refer to Section 3.7.1
to interface a PMT or photodiode and to Section 5.8 to adjust the AEC brightness for every
workstation using this type of device.
− Usable photodiode input signal in RAD:

Brightness gain adjusted via nominal input varying from about 12.5 mV to 9 V
or from about -12.5 mV to -9 V.
− Usable Photo multiplier tube input signal in RAD:

Brightness gain adjusted via the high voltage bias supply that varies from
about -200 V to about -950 V.
3.6.3 Remote Analog Signal/ Flat Panel Interfacing

Use J14 pin 10 to interface a flat panel or any remote analog signal (ex. CCD camera) to the ABS
circuitry of the generator (Figure 3.16). The input voltage might range between 0.1 and 10.0 VDC.
When connected, the ABS source for the device must be enabled using the Epsilon PC Tools
program (Remote AEC ; Section 4.5).
Figure 3.16 – Flat Panel AEC Interfacing Diagram.

3.6.4 SPD Dose Tracking Interface (Optional Feature)

The Source to Patient Distance (SPD) can be tracked during Fluoro to maintain the Fluoro surface
dose when the tube or the image amplifier moves. The distance is tracked using an analog signal
inputted at J14- pin 10, which ranges from 0.1 to 10 VDC (Figure 3.17).
Figure 3.17 – Typical SPD Input Interfacing Diagram.
3.7 FLUORO INTERFACE
3.7.1 Image Intensifier Pickup Device

Fluoro signals are interfaced on Fluoro PMT board P/N 9822.00 or on Photodiode Ion Chamber
Fluoro board P/N 11030.000 (Figures 3.18 & 3.19).
1. Connect the feedback signal (RG-59/U coaxial) :

a. From a phototube: To J5 BNC-connector on the Fluoro PMT board.
Gain can be varied from about -200 V to about -950 V.
b. From a photodiode: To J6 BNC-connector on the Fluoro PhD board.
Usable input signal range:
− Continuous Fluoro: from ~ 5mV to 1V or from ~ -5mV to -1V
− Pulsed Fluoro & AEC: from ~ 12.5mV to 9V or ~ -12.5mV to -9V
NOTE: On Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro board P/N 11030.000, two gain levels are
available to interface the photodiode. Use J10 connector to select the proper gain level:
Jumper in position 1-2: Normal gain for photodiode
Jumper in position 2-3: Low gain for photodiode (Slow ramp ABS)
2. For a phototube device, connect the high voltage supply of the phototube (RG-59/U coaxial) to
J1 BNC-connector on the Fluoro PMT board.
3. Refer to :
− Section 3.6.4 to interface SPD option, if fitted on the generator.
− Section 5.4 to adjust the Fluoro maximum surface dose.
− Section 5.5 to adjust the Fluoro stabilization dose.

3. Interfacing
Figure 3.18 – Connectors and potentiometers on Fluoro Boards.
Figure 3.19 – Photomultiplier Tube Interfacing Diagram on Fluoro PMT board P/N 9822.00.

3.7.2 Trigger (Pulsed Fluoro)

In Pulsed Fluoro, the trigger is necessary to synchronize the Fluoro gate with the imaging system
(Figure 3.20). The trigger input is provided on the Fluoro board:
− J3A, pin 6 on Fluoro board P/N 9822.00
− J3, pin 3 on Fluoro board P/N 11030.000
− And its selection is done through Epsilon PC Tools (Fluoro Configuration, see Section 4.6).
− The activation voltage level depends on the VTH (Section 3.4.1.2).
Figure 3.20 – Pulsed Fluoro Interfacing.
3.7.3 Fluoro Footswitch & Interlocks

Refer to Section 3.2.1 to interface the Fluoro pedals and to Section 3.4.2 for Fluoro Interlocks.
3.7.4 External Control for Fluoro Dose Stabilization

The generator provides an analog input for external control of the Fluoro dose stabilization. This is
optional since the Epsilon generator has a built-in dose stabilization circuitry (Section 5.5).
To remotely control the Fluoro stabilization, the line at J3 pin B3 (0 to 12 VDC, Figure 3.20) can be
used; this stabilization method requires that the ABS source in the Fluoro setup be set to Rmt AEC
(Remote AEC, Section 4.5).

3. Interfacing
3.8 COMMUNICATION PORTS
3.8.1 Communication with a Computer

Serial communication with a computer can be established using J16 port of Controller board or J6
port of the optional Epsilon Operator Console. Both serial ports can be used by the Epsilon PC
Tools program to configure or service the generator. Connect a standard RS-232 cable to link the
generator to the computer (Table 47).
Table 47- RS-232 Communication Ports

Generator Serial Ports Computer Serial Port
Pin
Controller J16 Console J6 DB9
1 GND N.C. N.U.
2 TX TX RX
3 RX RX TX
4 DTR N.C. N.U.
5 GND GND GND
6 GND N.C. N.U.
7 RTS RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS CTS
9 GND N.C. N.U.
Baud rate : 57600
Do not make an exposure when a computer or any external equipment is directly

connected to the operator console (J6) or generator (J16).
If exposing is necessary, use an optical isolator between the computer and the
console.
Recommended part: Optical Isolator, RS-232 to RS-232,
WARNING model 9SPOP2, from B&B Electronics
It is not recommended to connect a computer or any external equipment to the operator
console (J6) or generator (J16) without the use of an opto-isolator, unless that
equipment is battery-powered.

3.8.2 Communication with an External Console

Controller board's J10 connector can be used to communicate with an external console using the
emd proprietary RS-232 protocol. When serial ports of both devices are interconnected, dual
communication can be established and the generator be initialized.
For more information, refer to Technical Manual Supplement

For an external console to be used with the generator, it must also provide the power on/off
switching of the generator. This is achieved on the Controller J6 connector (Figure 3.21).
J6, pin 1 0 VDC Supply to external console

Application of +5 VDC to +15 VDC turns the generator power on.
J6, pin 2 Application of +0 VDC to +1 VDC turns the generator power off.
Current requirement: approximately 1 mA.
Figure 3.21 – (Up: J6) Generator Power On/Off from External Console.
(Below: J10) RS-232 Communication
Signal J10 Description
Ground Pins 1, 9 Generator serial port available for communication with an
external console using a proprietary protocol. Signals
TX Pin 2
comply with RS-232 specifications.
RX Pin 3
Needs generator power on/off signals (see J6 connector,
N.U. Pin 4
above).
Ground Pins 5, 6
Baud rate:
RTS Pin 7 Defaulted to 19, 200 (Configurable in PC Tools)
330Ω to 12 V Pin 8
Switching off the generator: Always turn off the generator by using the power off button on
the operator console or equivalent. When the tube is rotating, switching off the generator by
using the mains line contactor or any means other than the power off button will let the anode
coasting and might lead to hazardous consequences for the X-ray tube and/or anode starter.

4.0 SYSTEM SETUP
In this section, the power is applied for the first time to the generator. Then, using the Epsilon PC
Tools, the complete setup of the generator is made to customize it as per the installation site
characteristics and specific peripherals.
IN THIS CHAPTER :
4.1 GENERATOR POWER-ON TEST .................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2 EPSILON PC TOOLS PROGRAM................................................................................................................... 4-6

4.2.1 Program Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.2 Connecting the Generator to the PC Laptop ................................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.3 EPSILON PC TOOLS User’s Guide........................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.3.1 Program Primer .......................................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.3.2 Data Storage and Generator's Configuration ........................................................................................ 4-13
4.3 EPS GENERATOR CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................... 4-13

Software Options ............................................................................................................................................. 4-14
Hardware Options............................................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.4 TUBE SETUP ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-17

4.4.1 X-ray Tube Selection ....................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.2 X-ray Tube Derating........................................................................................................................................ 4-18
4.5 WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................... 4-20

4.5.1 Workstation Configuration............................................................................................................................. 4-20
RAD Exposure Types ..................................................................................................................................... 4-23
AEC Devices..................................................................................................................................................... 4-23
RAD Frame Rate Setup................................................................................................................................... 4-24
AEC Zero Point (Fluoro-RAD kV Transfer Curve).................................................................................. 4-25
Saving/Sending Workstation Configuration................................................................................................ 4-25
4.5.2 Programmable Inputs/Outputs Configuration ........................................................................................... 4-26
Programmable Inputs Configuration ............................................................................................................ 4-26
Programmable Outputs Configuration......................................................................................................... 4-28
4.6 FLUORO CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................................ 4-30

4.6.1 General Fluoro Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.6.2 Fluoro ABS Curves.......................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.6.3 Multi-Zoom Fluoro Dose Stabilization ........................................................................................................ 4-34
4.7 APR SETUP........................................................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.8 CONSOLE, LANGUAGE & TIME SETTINGS ......................................................................................... 4-39

4.8.1 Console Brightness, Contrast and Volume .................................................................................................. 4-39
4.8.2 Generator Clock ............................................................................................................................................... 4-40
4.8.3 Language Module ............................................................................................................................................. 4-40
4.8.3.1 Setting the Operator Console Language................................................................................................. 4-41
4.8.3.2 Console Language Translation Module .................................................................................................. 4-41

Operator Console Keys

1. Power Off 10. Ion Chamber’s Film-screen Selection (3)
2. Power On 11. mA/mAs Exposure Mode
3. RAD Switch 12. Ion Chamber’s Fields Selection (3)
4. PREP Switch 13. AEC Mode On/Off
5. Fluoro Alarm Reset (*) 14. Parameters / Selection (6)
6. Fluoro Timer Reset (*) 15. Graphic Screen Selection (8)
7. Fault Reset 16. RAD/Fluoro Mode Display (*)
8. Special Functions (3) 17. AEC Density Correction (2)
9. Workstation Selection (6) (**) 18. Patient Size (4)
Operator Console Status Indicators
A. Tube Selection F. Time Units Display
B. Focal Spot Selection G. AEC Density Bar Graph
C. System Limits H. Exposure PREP Indicator
D. Interlock Fault I. X-ray On Indicator
E. mA/mAs Display
Operator Console Screen Displays
i. kV Display iii. Exposure Time Display
ii. mA/mAs Display iv. Graphic Screen Display
(*) Keys not present on Epsilon RAD-only Operator Console
(**) 5 workstation selection keys on Epsilon RAD-only Operator Console
Figure 4.1(a) – RAD/RF Epsilon Operator Console Layout.

4. System Setup
Function/Control keys (39)

1. Disable X-Ray 9. Function keys (3)
2. Power off 10. Reset keys (3)
3. Power on 11. PREP switch
4. Parameter keys (manual mode) (6) 12. X-ray switch
5. AEC mode on/off 13. Patient size control (4)
6. AEC-Lock mode (not implemented) 14. RAD/Fluoro toggle key
7. Optical density control (2) 15. Menu selection keys (8)
8. Workstation selection (5)
LED status indicators (10)
A. Tube selection F. mA/mAs display
B. Focal spot selection G. Irradiation time (units) display
C. System limits H. Optical density selection
D. Interlock fault I. Exposure PREP indicator
E. X-ray disabled J. X-ray "on" indicator
Parameter displays (3) and graphic screen display (1)
i. kV parameter display iii. Irradiation time parameter display
ii. mA/mAs parameter display iv. Graphic screen display (alphanumeric)
Figure 4.1(b) – CV Epsilon Operator Console Layout.

The generator setup can be boiled down to the following items:
1. Generator Basic Configuration (Section 4.3) 4. I/Os Configuration (Section 4.5.2)

2. X-ray tube Setup (Section 4.4) 5. Fluoro Setup, if applicable (Section 4.6)
3. Workstations Setup (Section 4.5) 6. APR Setup (Section 4.7)
1. Make sure the EPS 45-80 High Voltage generator is installed and configured as
per the instructions in Chapters 2 & 3.
2. It is recommended to perform the generator configuration using the above
sequence order. Fill in the Installation Report found at the end of this manual.
3. Do not press PREP, RAD or Fluoro during the System Setup Procedure.
After the generator is setup, it will be ready for the final calibrations (Chapter 5):
7. Initial Turn-On & Stator Type 10. Fluoro Dose Stabilization (Section 5.5)
Configuration (Section 5.1) 11. Fluoro kV/mA Curves (Section 5.6)
8. X-ray tube Calibration (Section 5.2)
9. Fluoro Entrance Exposure Rate (Section 5.4) 12. AEC Fine-Tuning (Section 5.7)
4.1 GENERATOR POWER-ON TEST
HIGH VOLTAGE, AC LINE-CONNECTED

POTENTIALS ARE PRESENT IN NUMEROUS
CIRCUITS.
If the top cover is removed from the of EPS 45-80 generator, the utmost care must be taken as dangerous and
lethal potentials are present in offline circuits in several places! Every one of the heat sinks shown in the
picture below is at live AC line voltage!
Even when the generator is switched off at the operator console, mains voltages are still present in High-
Voltage Power Supply unit. These voltages are extremely dangerous, use the utmost caution.
1. Make sure the generator is installed as per the instructions of Chapters 2 & 3.
2. Turn on the power to the generator at the mains line

disconnect box. Verify that the "AC Power" LED lights
green on the High-Voltage Power Supply unit, on top of
the Line Filter board (opposite figure).
3. Turn on the power to the generator using the operator

console. The generator goes through a self-test routine.
Verify that no fault is detected on the console during
the power-on process. See Figure 4.1 for console layout.

4. System Setup
4. After power up, the operator console should display the initial power on screen shown in Figure
4.2 (1.), with the default workstation and initial tube loading factors.
• If the message displayed on the console is not “Small Fil. Calib. Required”, go to Section
7.4 to take an action as a function of the displayed message.
• If the message “Small Fil. Calib. Required” displays, press [Next] selection key twice
until the message “Anode H.U. = 0%” displays (Figure 4.2, 3.).
1. 2. 3.
Figure 4.2 – Typical sequence of power up screens on the Epsilon Operator Console.
5. Depress the Fault Reset key on the console until the Monitor Mode displays on the graphic
screen. Choose "Inverters" to invoke the Inverters Status screen (Figure 4.3). Make sure that no
BAD or FUSE status message displays on any Inverter board. Then, press "Exit" key and
proceed with the system setup of Sections 4.3 through 4.8.
Select
Inverters
Hold key to
Monitor
Figure 4.3 – Inverter Status screen in Console’s Monitor Mode.

Refer to Section 7.5.2.8 for details on Monitor Mode.
Switching off the generator: Always turn off the generator by using the power off button
on the operator console. When the tube is rotating, switching off the generator by using the
mains line contactor or any means other than the power off button will let the anode coasting
and might lead to hazardous consequences for the X-ray tube and/or anode starter.

4.2 EPSILON PC TOOLS PROGRAM
The Epsilon PC Tools program must be installed on a laptop or PC in order to:

• Facilitate the configuration of the generator.
• Manage the system database (backup the generator database or duplicate an installation setup
onto another generator).
• Monitor the generator in live operating conditions.
• Troubleshoot or service the generator.
4.2.1 Program Installation

Epsilon PC Tools program can be found on the electronic documentation CD or on
your personal customer page on emd technologies web site.
1. Close all applications and resident programs currently running on your computer.
2. Explore the contents of the CD and double click on the Epsilon PC Tools.exe program file.
3. The Installation program will prompt you for specific information. At each prompt, select the
appropriate response and/or click “Next”.
4.2.2 Connecting the Generator to the PC Laptop

1. Connect the generator to your service computer.
For a RS-232 port: Connect a standard RS-232 cable to link the generator to a serial port of a
PC. Use either J16 on the Controller or J6 on the Operator Console.
Refer to Section 3.8.1, if necessary.
NOTE For computer not equipped with a COM (RS-232) serial port, use an
USB adaptor. Recommended devices are:
• Edgeport/1 USB Converter, by Digi ConnectwareTM
• GUC232A USB to Serial Adapter, by IOGEAR
• RS-232 Optical Isolator (B & B electronics, P/N US09ML2)
For a USB port: This method is available on Epsilon Operator Consoles

P/N 9777.21 and above only. Use a standard USB printer cable to
interconnect the service laptop to the console. The installation of a USB driver
might be necessary for Windows XP® or Vista®. Refer to the sidebar on next
pages for the installation procedure.
2. Launch the Epsilon PC Tools program on your computer.
3. In the "Transfer" menu, choose "Connect" to establish the bidirectional

communication between the computer and the generator.

4. System Setup
Do not make an exposure when a computer or any external equipment is connected

to the operator console (J6) or generator (J16). When making X-rays is
necessary, use an optical isolator between the computer and the console.
Recommended part: Optical Isolator, RS-232 to RS-232,
model 9SPOP2, from B&B Electronics
WARNING
It is not recommended to connect a computer or any external equipment to the
operator console (J6) or generator (J16) without the use of an opto-isolator,
unless that equipment is battery-powered.
FTDI USB Driver Installation

To install the USB driver for an Epsilon Operator Console (USB model), follow the following
instructions. The procedure below is done for Windows XP but it also works well for a Vista
operating system.
1. Have installed on your service computer the Epsilon PC Tools program and the USB-Driver
for emd Operator Console (USB-Driver_EMD Operator_Console.zip). These two files can be
found on the electronic documentation CD (Figure a) or on your personal customer page on
emd technologies web site.
Figure a – Locate the necessary files on the electronic documentation CD.
2. Unzip the driver on the local hard disk.
3. Connect the USB Printer cable between the laptop and the operator console.
4. Turn on the generator. The message “Find New Hardware” will display on the Notification
bar, followed by the “Found New Hardware Wizard”.
5. On the new Hardware wizard, choose “No, not this time” and then click Next button. Select
“Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)” and then click Next button (Figure b).
6. Select “Include this location in the search” and click the Browse button (Figure c). Locate the
unzipped driver folder on your local disk (USB-Driver for emd Operator Console).

Figure b – New hardware wizard first Installation steps.
Figure c – Locate the driver folder on your local disk.
7. If the compatibility window displays (Figure d, right), click the “Continue Anyway” button.
Note: On some computers, it is possible that the above installation steps should be repeated
once before final installation could be completed successfully.
Figure d – Installation of the driver by the Windows Wizard.

4. System Setup
8. After the installation is completed, click the Finish button (Figure e). Then, verify on which
port the driver has been installed on your laptop. This is done using the Windows control
panel (Figure f):
Control Panel/System/System Properties Hardware/Device Manager/Ports (COM &
LPT1)/USB Serial Port (EMD technologies settings) (COM“n”).
Figure e – End of Installation.
Figure f – Device Manager.
< Figure g – Serial Communication Settings on

Epsilon PC Tools.
9. Open the PC Tools Program. Choose “Transfer/Settings” and select the correct COM port.
Click the OK button (figure g).
10. The communication with the operator console can now be established.

4.2.3 EPSILON PC TOOLS User’s Guide
4.2.3.1 Program Primer

1. Connect the generator to your computer and launch the Epsilon PC Tools program.
2. Select either “Open an existing configuration file” or “Create a new configuration file”
and click the OK button (Figure 4.4).
Figure 4.4 – Epsilon PC Tools Initial Screen.

• Choosing “Open an existing configuration file” displays the Open File dialog box
(Figure 4.5, left) from which an existing file can be selected and opened. This will load
the selected file and display the Workstation configuration screen of Figure 4.6.
• Choosing “Create a new configuration file” loads a default file (Untitled.emd) and displays the
Options screen of Figure 4.5, right.
Open File Dialog Box Options Screen.

Figure 4.5 – Open & Options screens.
3. Locate the following elements on the screen (Figure 4.6): the title bar, the menu bar, the
different parameter configuration zones where the generator database can be edited, the status
line and connection status at the bottom of the screen.

4. System Setup
Title Bar (with file name, if any)
Menu Bar
Database
Configuration
Parameters
Messages
Status Bar Connection Status
Figure 4.6 – Epsilon PC Tools typical user interface screen.
Epsilon PC Tools main menus
1. 2. 3. 4.
4. Before beginning the setup of a generator, it is wise to save the current blank file by using the
menu "File" and "Save As". Use a file name that will clearly identify the generator. For
example, the file could be named EPS65RF.emd or Saint-Eustache Hospital.emd. The file will also
serve as a backup of the generator database (Section 4.2.3.2).
5. At any moment, a given configuration file can be retrieved by using the menu "File" and
choosing "Open".

6. To establish the communication between the computer and a connected generator:

(i) select the menu "Transfer" and choose "Connect" or
(ii) double-click on the "Connection status" icon (bottom right-hand corner) until the
connection status toggles to “Monitor/Transfer” (Figure 4.7).
Connection status Possible actions

1. Open, Edit & Save configuration files on PC. Used to manage the generator
database located on an external PC (hard disk).
Communication between the generator and the PC is not allowed.
1. Open, Edit & Save configuration files on PC.
2. Check and validate the configuration options of the EPS generator.
3. Monitor the generator using Tools/Service/Monitor.
4. Send/receive Calibration data (*)( ) from/to generator.
1. Open, Edit & Save configuration files on PC.
2. Check and validate the configuration options of the EPS generator.
3. Monitor the generator using Tools/Service/Monitor.
4. Send/receive Calibration data (*)( ) from/to generator.
5. Send/receive Configuration data ( ) from/to generator. This data consists in the
APR, workstation configuration, I/O, Fluoro & X-ray tube configuration.
(*) On certain EPS configurations, the calibration data is identified on PC Tools user interface by its
orange color appearance and can be transmitted using the right-mouse button. Other calibration data
is also available in Tools/Service/Generator Calibration window.
( ) When new data is sent to the generator, it overwrites the corresponding data existing on
the generator. Beware that this might significantly change the way the generator will
behave.
Figure 4.7 – Connection Status & Possible Data Exchange using Epsilon PC Tools.
7. To transmit the whole set of parameters from the PC’s configuration file to a connected
generator, select "Transfer" and "Send to Generator".
To replace the data of the current configuration file (on the PC) with the complete generator
database data of the connected generator, select "Transfer" and "Get from generator".
Note that in Monitor/Transfer connection mode, the operator console is set in Service mode
(Figure 4.8). This mode is discussed later in the manual.
Hold WK1 key

and turn on power
to enter Service Mode
Service Mode: The service mode is invoked by turning on the

operator console at the same time than holding down WS1 key.
Release only WS1 key when the service mode displays on the
graphic screen.
Figure 4.8 –Epsilon Console in Service Mode.

4. System Setup
4.2.3.2 Data Storage and Generator's Configuration
Important
The default parameters on a new machine will have to be customized to interface the generator
with the specific peripheral equipment and user’s working preferences.
Use the “File Save As” PC Tools command to save the configuration file on disk under a
meaningful name (for example Saint-Eustache.emd). PC Tools uses emd extension only.
While the service representative gradually configures the generator by editing the generator database,
it is recommended to backup the installation data by making a copy of the configuration file on the
hard disk. This will permit an eventual reload of the generator data from the computer in cases data
corruption has occurred.
The complete backup of the generator data is held onto 4 different files.
• Refer to Section 8.2.3.5 to make a complete backup.
• Refer to Section 7.7.3 for a description of the data files.
4.3 EPS GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
The EPS generator comes in several possible configurations, for example RAD-only, RAD/Fluoro,
2-tube configuration, and with a certain number of optional expansion boards.
1. Before beginning the setup of the generator, make sure you start with an existing configuration
file or, else, create a new one.
To create a new configuration file from a blank file:
• Connect the generator to the PC, start Epsilon PC Tools
and select “Create a new configuration file”.
• Save the current “untitled” blank file by using the menu
"File" and "Save As". Use a file name that will clearly
identify the EPS generator currently installed. Save as…
2. Double-click twice on the "Connection status" icon (bottom right-hand corner) of the Epsilon
PC Tool status bar until the status toggles to “Monitor/Transfer”.
Select Transfer/Get from generator to replace the current file data on the PC with the
complete configuration data of the connected generator. This is an important preliminary step
before continuing with the complete configuration of the generator described next. It makes
sure that the current working data file (*.emd file) has software options and other basic features
compatible with the ones shipped with the generator.

3. In the menu bar, select View/Options to invoke the Options configuration screen. This screen
shows up software and hardware options available for the EPS generator (Figure 4.9).
The appearance of this screen could vary as a function of the generator configuration.
Figure 4.9 – Options Configuration Screen.
4. Use the configuration sheet of your generator to set up the appropriate options (Figure 4.9).
Software Options
a) Power Options Configuration
i) Power Type : Set the Power type as per the following configuration table:
Power Type Type 7 Type 6 Type 5 Type 4
Max kW 80 kW 85 kW 90 kW 100 kW
The power type configuration is fixed and specified at the factory. If this figure is changed,
whenever the compatibility check is done or data is exchanged with the PC, the default value
will be restored.
ii) Max kW/mA:

Your generator is shipped with a maximum power and mA already set in the machine. This
figure depends on the hardware provided with the generator.
NOTE: Always perform the power configuration before entering any APR exam as this
setup fixes the parameter limits of the generator.

4. System Setup
b) Radiography Options Configuration

i) APR: Enable the APR option to have access to the APR
database programming. Clearing the “APR Enabled” option box will
disable the APR (no exams available at the console).
ii) Cone Beam CT: Checking the “Cone Beam CT” option box will enable this
functionality on the generator.
For “CBCT Configuration”, refer to Technical Manual Supplement

iii) High Performance RAD: Checking the “High Performance RAD” option box will
enable this functionality on the generator.
iv) Hidden AEC Back-Up: Checking the “Hidden AEC Backup” option box will enable
this functionality on the generator. Refer to Section 7.7.2 for information.
v) Falling Load: This option allows the generator to initiate an AEC-mAs exposure at a
higher tube current value, after which the mA drops as the exposure proceeds.
c) Fluoroscopy Options Configuration

Choose which type of Fluoro is installed on your generator, if any:
Normal Continuous and/or Pulsed Fluoro
High Power Continuous Fluoro (requires option P/N 10011.000)
High Performance Pulsed Fluoro (requires option P/N 10012.000)
5. Use the Compatibility Check button to verify that the software options are
well configured on your generator.
Note: If the selected kW and mA combination or other software option is improperly set,
Epsilon PC Tools won’t allow you to continue the rest of the generator configuration
The program will return an “Incorrect Option” message if

the connected generator does not support one or more
selected options or certain expansion boards. Not supported
options are displayed in red color.

Hardware Options
a) Expansion Boards Configuration (Figure 4.10):
i. First setup the Expansion Motherboard configuration
(None, Expansion Motherboard or CPX Adapter).
ii. When an Expansion Motherboard is present on the generator, set up the attached
expansion boards by using the drop down lists of the four slot positions. The slot number
corresponds to the position in the generator basket, from left to right. Boards shall
inserted from the first free position available beginning from J4 (right-most) connector.
Figure 4.10 – Hardware Options Configuration
b) Other Options:
i) Biplane Configuration: For biplane configuration, check the
Biplane Enabled option box to enable the functionality.
For “Biplane Configuration”, refer to Technical Manual Supplement

ii) Disable Auto Gain: This option box should be left unchecked (Auto Gain enabled) for
most ABS types. It should be disabled (option box checked) only on certain types of
ABS systems using the “Rem AEC signal” as ABS gain source (Controller J14, pin 10)
combined with a very slow feedback ABS device (or with delayed ABS response).

4. System Setup
6. Whenever the options configuration is modified, the Apply button (Figure 4.9) must be pressed
to acknowledge the new setup.
NOTE: If the options configuration is set up using the “Get from generator” method
(Transfer/Connect/ Get from generator), it is possible that the obtained Hardware setup does
not fit the generator setup accurately, or that the compatibility check does not take into account
certain expansion boards. Therefore, it is better to make it manually by choosing which board is present in
which slot.
7. Use the File menu to save the file on the PC. If necessary, send the newly configured data on the
generator (Section 4.2.3).
4.4 TUBE SETUP
The Tube Setup module is used to transfer the X-ray tube chart of the connected tube(s) to the
generator before the X-ray tube could be calibrated (Section 5.2) and the generator be fully
functional. This step is of the utmost importance as it ensures the X-ray tube operating
parameters are within safe limits.
4.4.1 X-ray Tube Selection

1. Connect the generator to the computer and open the configuration file for your
generator.
2. With Epsilon PC Tools in communication mode (Monitor/Transfer), select View and Tube to
invoke the X-ray Tube module (Figure 4.11). A default Tube setup loads at the first installation.
3. Click Import… button to choose an X-ray tube from the tube library of the
Epsilon PC Tools program. If your tube is not listed in the tube library, contact
emd technologies service organization for a technical advice.
The tube library (*.tub) uses file names very similar to the manufacturer tube models.
4. Verify that the tube data displayed by the program does correspond to the tube chart of the
manufacturer.
Important For any discrepancy in the tube chart characteristics, contact our service organization
before initiating the tube calibration. Emd technologies does not guarantee the accuracy or adequacy of
the tube charts and is not responsible for any tube damage resulting from misuse of tube charts provided
with the generator.
5. Save the file to make this tube chart parts of the current configuration file (*.emd) for your
system and send the data to the generator (Section 4.2.3).
6. Repeat the process for the X-ray tube number 2, if any.

Boost Time & Brake Time

Recommended values for high speed boost/brake are given for
indication only (gray figures) and can be modified if desired (500 -
15000 ms). Low speed boost time is about ¾ times the High Speed
boost time value.
Figure 4.11 – Epsilon X-ray Tube Setup Module.
4.4.2 X-ray Tube Derating
The tube derating feature :

• Shall be done on an X-ray tube that is already configured as per § 4.4.1 only.
• Shall always be followed by a tube calibration (Section 5.2).
A tube can be derated to extend its usable lifetime, to troubleshoot specific conditions or other
reasons. Derating any of the X-ray tube factors necessarily limits the generator’s X-ray factors and
therefore might reduce the exposure techniques kW. For example, if the filament current value of
the small filament is derated to 3.5 A and the requested tube mA requires a filament heating higher
than this value, the generator might either switch to the large filament (autofocal spot mode) or, else,
it will refuse the current technique by displaying the following operator message: “Tube Fil Limit”.

4. System Setup
To derate the X-ray tube operative parameters, perform the following procedure:
1. Connect the generator to the PC and open the configuration file for your generator.
2. With Epsilon PC Tools in communication mode (Monitor/Transfer), select View and Tube to
invoke the X-ray Tube module (Figure 4.11).
3. Derate any of the following parameters:

a. Maximum kV: Reduce the maximum tube kV that will be allowed by the generator.
b. kW percent: Use this option to reduce the kW allowed on one or both tube filaments.
c. Maximum Filament Current: Use this option to reduce the maximum tube current (A)
on one or both filaments.
Tube Data Usable range
Maximum kV 50-100%
Small/ Large Filament kW Output 50-100%
Small /Large Filament Maximum Current 50-100%
Boost & Brake Times 500 -15000 ms
If the maximum tube kV is subsequently increased on a derated X-ray tube, the

maximum Fluoro Entrance dose adjustment must be redone (Section 5.4). This is
true for derated values below 125 (maximum Fluoro kV).
4. Save the configuration file and send the data to the generator (Section 4.2.3). If necessary, repeat
the process for the X-ray tube number 2, if any.
5. Whenever changes are brought about on an existing tube setup, it is possible to save the
modified tube characteristics on the PC. This is done by using the Export feature in the X-ray
tube Setup screen (Figure 4.11). The new data (tube data and derating values) is saved on disk
with a .tub filename extension and can be used later on by the import feature of the Tube Setup
module for another generator configuration.

4.5 WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION

PC TOOLS … VIEW
Done => Options
Here… Workstations
Make sure the Software & Hardware options and the See Section 4.7 APR
tube setup are configured (Sections 4.3 & 4.4) before See Section 4.5.2 Inputs
continuing with the following configuration. See Section 4.5.2 Outputs
See Section 4.6 Fluoro
See Section 5.7 AEC Chambers
Done => Tube
Up to six (6) workstations will have to be configured as a function of the connected equipment and
dedicated application. This is detailed in Sections 4.5.1 & 4.5.2.
4.5.1 Workstation Configuration

1. Connect the generator to the computer and open the configuration file for the generator.
2. With Epsilon PC Tools in communication mode (Monitor/Transfer), select View/Workstations

to invoke the Workstation configuration screen (Figure 4.12). The appearance of the screen varies
as a function of the generator hardware.
The appearance of this screen varies as a function of the generator hardware.

Figure 4.12 – Workstation Configuration Screen.
3. Click on the W.S. 1 tab to configure the first workstation. Set the "Enable W.S." checkbox to
enable the workstation. Clear the checkbox to disable the workstation; then choose another
workstation to continue.

4. System Setup
4. For the current workstation, setup the following parameters :

a. Name: Choose a name for the workstation. Click in the name zone and enter up to 10
characters. This name will appear on the console’s graphic screen.
PC Tools Workstation Epsilon console Graphic screen

Note that on the Epsilon operator consoles, the workstations are iconized in the following
manner, with associated standard names:
Epsilon RF Operator Console:
DIGITAL; TABLE BUCKY; WALL BUCKY;
1. 2. 3.
NON-BUCKY; SPOT FILM; TOMO.

4. 5. 6.
Epsilon CV Operator Console:
CARDIAC-kW; CARDIAC-mA; D.A.;

1. 2. 3.
D.S.A.; --- WARM-UP.

4. 5. 6.
For Operator Console P/N 9777.31 only: Note that the following
associations are done between the workstation numbers (MODE in Figure
below) and their physical locations on the operator console. Workstation 5 is
not available with this operator console and should be disabled in PC Tools.
Workstations (MODE) on
Operator Console
P/N 9777.31
Wks Numbers in PC Tools WS1 WS2 WS3 WS4 WS6

Relation between console workstations and PC Tools W.S. numbers.
b. Default W.S.: Set the "Default Workstation" checkbox to load the current workstation on
the console at power on. Only one workstation can be defaulted.

c. Fluoro: To enable Fluoro on the current workstation, set "Enable Fluoro" checkbox
Note that Fluoro is available on Tube 1 only.
Note: When the "Default Fluoro" checkbox is set ( ), the console will be defaulted, on
that workstation, with the display of the Fluoro parameters (instead of RAD).
d. Tube: If a tube switch is fitted on the generator, assign a tube number to the current
workstation. Tube 1 (or Tube 2)
e. Anode speed: Specify the anode speed defaulted at the workstation selection. For cardiac
workstations configuration, it is highly recommended to select automatic anode speed since
cardiac exams usually imply high kW, or high mA.
High Speed (or Low, or Auto)
f. Continuance: Set the desired continuance timer. At the expiration of the timer, the anode will
be braked. Note that the timer is reset to zero each time irradiation is done
 (up to 60 minutes)
g. Exposure switch:
Enable the exposure switch(es) to be used with current workstation (=> § 3.2).
Note: The console must be selected if the Hand-Switch option is fitted on the generator.
5. Assign the trigger input attached to the workstation (Section 3.3) and specify its activation mode:
Trigger mode: Start rising/falling, stop timer (i) Trigger source:
Start rising/falling, stop rising/falling (ii) Choose the input pin desired for each
Internal (S/W) (iii) workstation or select “Line” (iv).
i. Stopping the exposure using a timer is typical to most exposure modes. The exposure stops by
a counter (mAs or AEC) or timer.
ii. Stopping the exposure using a trigger’s edge is typically used in tomography applications.
iii. When Internal (S/W) trigger mode is selected, the Epsilon generator will perform exposures at
the operator selected frame rate and exposure parameters and no external trigger is required.
iv. When Line is used as a trigger source, the zero crossings of the mains supply are used to
synchronize the exposures and no external trigger is required.
v. The generator has an operator selected frame rate and will not permit exposures to be performed
any faster than that selected frame rate. If external triggers come at a slower rate than the
selected frame rate, exposures will follow the trigger rate but if triggers come at a faster rate that
selected, then some triggers will be missed.

4. System Setup
RAD Exposure Types

6. Enable every exposure types used for the current workstation:
The following three (3) mutually exclusive groups of exposure types are available:
I. RAD/RF modes II. Cardiac modes III. Vascular modes
3-point Cardiac-mA D.A.
2-point Cardiac-kW D.S.A.
AEC kV-mA-BUmAs
AEC kV-BUmAs
AEC Zero-Point
Cone Beam CT
Falling Mode (*)
Notes:
(*) Optional AEC mode. Refer to Section 7.7.2 for more information.
AEC Devices
7. In the AEC Control zone, assign the AEC device working with the current workstation, if any.
According to the type of AEC sensor and the AEC feedback input location, make the following
selections:
ION # 1 (1) (Controller board, J13); Solid State Chamber # 4 (1, 2) (J3 connector)
ION # 2 (1) (Controller board, J8); Solid State Chamber # 5 (1, 2) (J4 connector)
Remote AEC (Do not select this option); Solid State Chamber # 6 (1, 2) (J5 connector)
ION # 3 (1, 2) (J1 connector); Phototube (PMT)(3) (J5 connector)
ION # 8 (1, 4) (J5 connector); Photodiode (PhD)(4) (J6 connector)
ION # 9 (1, 4) (J4 connector);
(1) For an AEC chamber, select the film/screen and input fields that will be allowed with the ion
chamber or solid state chamber:
Selection of film-screens; Slow ; Medium ; Fast ;
Selection of active fields; Left ; Center ; Right .
(2) On Universal chambers Interface board P/N 11002.000.
(3) On Fluoro PMT board P/N 9822.00:
Select the source for the PMT gain adjustment:
i. Potentiometers located on Fluoro PMT board
ii. Software (uses an internal D/A to set the gain value)
iii. External (J3B, pin 3 on Fluoro PMT board)
(4) On Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro board P/N 11030.000.
MULTI-ZOOM FUNCTION (For generators with High Performance
Pulsed Fluoro): If an ion chamber is to be used in conjunction with
selectable I.I. magnification sizes, the “Flat” film screen selection
must be done.

RAD Frame Rate Setup

8. Configure the RAD frame rate operation (Figure 4.13).
• Enable the proper frame rate selection using the checkbox located at their left. Different
frame rates can be chosen using the Frame Rate tab (see next step).
• If only one frame rate is available, you can disable the display of the frame rate on the
operator console in serial mode by clearing the "Display F/S feature" checkbox).
9. Click on the Frame Rate tab to set the RAD frame rate operation available for serial exposures.
i. Setup the frame rate using the horizontal selection bars (Figure 4.13, left). Up to seven (7)
frame rates are available. For optimum friendliness, enable only those frame rates that will
actually be used.
Note: Only one set of frame rate selections is provided for all serial workstations. This
configuration should be done once only (do not repeat it for all workstations).
ii. For remote selection or remote transmission of frame rate, assign the proper bit configuration
(up to 3 bits) for the communication (Figure 4.13, right).
Note: The generator uses the console to select the frame rate when the three bits are set
open. Therefore, do not set any frame rate value to all 3 bits unchecked (not set).
Figure 4.13 – Frame Rate Configuration screen.

4. System Setup
AEC Zero Point (Fluoro-RAD kV Transfer Curve)

10. If necessary, click on the AEC Zero Pt tab to adjust the Fluoro-RAD kV Transfer Function.
This curve is defaulted to 1:1 (slope = 0, b=0) and can be modified by moving one or both
curves extremities. The slope cannot be negative.
Figure 4.14 – Fluoro-RAD kV Transfer Function Module.
Saving/Sending Workstation Configuration
11. Use the File menu to save the workstation configuration on your hard disk and send the data to
the generator.

4.5.2 Programmable Inputs/Outputs Configuration

Input and output signals can be customized for certain functions or peripheral equipment.
Many I/Os are provided on the Controller board. Additional I/Os are provided by expansion
boards (optional boards) connected onto the Expansion Motherboard.
1. Make sure the Expansion board configuration is done in the Options setup (Section 4.3.1).
2. In the menu bar, select View and Inputs to invoke the Programmable Inputs configuration screen
(Figure 4.15).

Figure 4.15 – Input Configuration Screen.
Programmable Inputs Configuration

3. For every input line interfaced with the generator, specify the type of input (Table 48), which
application it will serve, and for which workstation(s) it will be used.
a. For interlock type inputs, enter the name of the interlock to be displayed on the graphic
screen during interlock condition (use 10 characters maximum).
b. If the Fluoro Photodiode board (PhD tab) is present on the generator, set
up the signal activation polarity and choose a voltage (0 to 24 V) for the
termination resistor.

4. System Setup
Table 48- Input Types

Types of Inputs Applications/Functions
1. Interlock Exposure security set in RAD and Fluoro. See also Section 3.4.2.
• Interlock Ready The generator requires that the interlock be true before toggling from Prep to
ready mode. The interlock is required once per sequence to pass from PREP
to ready.
• Interlock Start The generator requires that the interlock be true before main gate goes from
off to on. The interlock is verified during the generator's Prep and Ready
states.
• Interlock X-ray The generator requires that the interlock be true for the duration of the
exposure.
• Visible in Idle Signal is verified during idle in order to display an interlock message on the
console before the exposure process is initiated.
2. Frame Rate Selection Remote selection of RAD and/or Fluoro frame rate (see Figure 4.13);
(Bits 0-2) F. R. selectable during Fluoro or during idle in RAD.
3. AEC Lock Remote selection of Lock mode, in RAD and/or Fluoro.
4. AEC Reset Reset AEC Backup Time Fault.
5. Fluoro Alarm Reset Reset the Fluoro Alarm.
6. I.I. Mag (Bits 0-1) Used with High Performance Pulsed Fluoro configuration only (*)
7. Workstation Select Used in CBCT mode only. Do not use these inputs for any other purpose.
8. Exam Select
(*) MULTI-ZOOM FUNCTIONALITY: This selection permits the

remote selection of the image intensifier magnification by using
the following two (2) digital inputs:
I. I.I. Mag. Bit 0 input
II. I.I. Mag. Bit 1 input
When different Image Intensifier magnifications are possible

(multifield I. I.), every magnification level must be adjusted
independently of the others (see Section 5.5).

Programmable Outputs Configuration

4. In the menu bar, select View and Outputs to invoke the Programmable Outputs configuration
screen (Figure 4.16).

Figure 4.16 – Output Configuration Screen.
5. For each output line interfaced with your equipment, specify the type of output and with which
workstation(s) it will be used (see Table 49). Select RAD and/or Fluoro applications, as
necessary.
i. Beware that the software configuration matches the hardware interfaced done in Chapter 3.
ii. For programmable outputs (Table 49, item 4), setup the output as a function of the different
generator states.
iii. For the frame rate transmission lines coding (Table 49, item 3), refer to Figure 4.13.
iv. If the Fluoro Photodiode board (PhD tab) is present on the generator,
set up the signal activation polarity and choose a voltage (4 to 24 V) for
the High Level output. Active low polarity will put a 0 VDC at the
output pin when the signal is active.
6. Save the data on your hard disk and send it to the generator (§ 4.2.3).

4. System Setup
Table 49- Output Types

Types of Outputs Applications/Functions
1. X-ray On Output goes low during loading of X-ray tube, and stays on for a minimum of
250 ms. It stays open at any other moment.
2. Buzzer Output goes low whenever the alarm is activated.
3. Frame rate bits 0-2 Transmission of the current selection of RAD/Fluoro frame rate.
Idle Output goes low when WKS N is selected, no Prep/Expose/Fluoro switch is
pressed and no fault is detected.
PREP Output goes low when WKS N is selected, Prep switch N is actuated and filament
boosting and anode acceleration are under way. The output returns high whenever
4. Programmable Generator State Outputs
Prep is terminated (Ready state is obtained).

On the optional Epsilon Console, the Prep LED blinks.
Ready Output goes low when WKS N is selected, Prep switch N is actuated, the anode is up
to speed, the filament boost is terminated and all Ready interlocks are true.
On the optional Epsilon Console, the Prep LED lights on green.
Run or Output goes low when WKS N is selected, the system is ready, Expose switch N is
“Run-X” (*) activated and all Start & X-ray interlocks (for WKS N) are true. The generator could
be either exposing or waiting for a trigger.
On the optional Epsilon Console, the X-ray On LED lights on yellow.
Fluoro HI Output goes low during Fluoro High level.
Fluoro LO Output goes low during Fluoro Low level.
Fault Output goes low when the generator latched a fault condition.
5. Heat Units Output goes low when the tube heat units reach the programmed threshold value,
in percent of utilized H.U. The output returns off (open) when the tube cools down
below that same H.U. amount. The threshold can be set to between 1 % and 100 %
of utilized tube heat units.
6. FN key Momentary Output goes low (active) when function key is pressed (LED lights on).
7. FN key Toggled Output state toggles each time the function key is pressed (LED lights on when
output is active).
(*) See “Differences between RUN and RUN-X outputs”, next page.

(*) Differences between RUN and RUN-X outputs:
Both “Run” and “RUN-X” output will go true in a RAD sequence when all of the following conditions
are true:
1. Both Prep and RAD switches are pressed. 4. All Ready Interlock Inputs have allowed the
2. The anode is turning at the correct speed. Ready State.
3. The selected filament is at proper temperature. 5. All Start and X-Ray Interlock inputs are true.
6. No fault is detected.
Once true, a “Run” output will go false when any of Once true, a “Run-X” output will go false when any
the following condition occurs: of the following condition occurs:
1. EITHER the Prep or the RAD switch is
1. BOTH Prep and RAD switches are released.
released.
2. Any X-Ray Interlock goes false. 2. Any X-Ray Interlock goes false;
A false Ready or Start Interlock cannot stop a A false Ready or Start Interlock cannot stop a
RUN sequence in progress. RUN-X sequence in progress.
3. The number of exposures allowed in the Note: The RUN-X output stays TRUE after the
sequence has been performed. In the case of a number of exposures allowed in the sequence has
single exposure, the Run output goes false after been performed. Only the release of both exposure
the exposure. switches will disable the RUN-X output.
The sequence is halted (and the outputs toggled to false) by any generator fault.
4.6 FLUORO CONFIGURATION
For EPS RAD/Fluoro generators, perform the Fluoro Setup configuration as per the following
instructions.
PC TOOLS … VIEW
Done => Options
Done => Workstations
See Section 4.7 APR
Make sure the options, the tube setup and workstations
Done => Inputs
are configured before Fluoro setup is done. Done => Outputs
Here… Fluoro
Done => Tube

4. System Setup
4.6.1 General Fluoro Setup

1. Connect the generator to the computer and open the configuration file for the generator.
2. With Epsilon PC Tools in communication mode (Monitor/Transfer), select View/Fluoro to

invoke the Fluoro configuration screen (Figure 4.17). The appearance of the screen varies as a
function of the generator hardware.
Figure 4.17 – General Fluoro Configuration screen.
3. In General Fluoro Setup tab:

• MODE: Choose Continuous or Pulsed Fluoro. When both Fluoro types
are available, Dual Fluoro mode can be enabled to allow the operator
switching from Continuous to Pulsed Fluoro (and vice versa).
Dual Fluoro mode is not available with High Power Fluoro and High Performance Pulsed Fluoro.
I. Set ( ) the "High Level Fluoro" option to provide Fluoro with two different maximum
entrance rate levels. This mode requires two Fluoro footswitches (Section 3.2.2).
II. Enable ( ) or disable ( ) the "Manual Fluoro" mode. This mode
permits doing Fluoro at parameters manually selected by the operator. The
starting dose on a new patient in manual Fluoro is defaulted to the
value set in the “Starting Dose (Manual)” zone.

III. IMAGE ENHANCEMENT (OPTION): Select this option to enable

Image Enhancement mode.
Do not adjust the Enhancement factors yet.

This setup will be done later (Section 5.4.3).
• SPD (OPTION): If Source-To-Patient Distance tracking is interfaced with the generator,

enable the SPD tracking function.
• ANODE SPEED: Choose the anode speed:

1. RAD Speed; 2. Low Speed; 3. High Speed. For faster transition from Fluoro to RAD,
select RAD speed for the anode rotation.
• ALARM TIMER: Set the Timer for the Fluoro alarm (up to 5 minutes).
• PULSE RATE: For optimum friendliness in Pulsed Fluoro, enable only those pulse rates that
will be used.
• MIN./MAX./STARTING KV: Use these settings to configure the kV range and starting kV in
Fluoro. The starting kV is used at the beginning of a new patient exam only.
• MAXIMUM MA SMALL FILAMENT: This selection permits to specify a maximum mA threshold

value for the Fluoro small filament, beyond which Fluoro would switch to the large filament.
This value should be considered together with the adjustment of the Maximum Fluoroscopic
Entrance Exposure Rate (Section 5.4).
• SOURCE FOR ABS CONTROL : Identify the source for the ABS Fluoro dose stabilization:
ION # 1 (1) (Controller board, J13) Solid State Chamber # 4 (1, 3) (J3 connector)
ION # 2 (1) (Controller board, J8) Solid State Chamber # 5 (1, 3) (J4 connector)
ION # 3 (1, 3) (J1 connector) Solid State Chamber # 6 (1, 3) (J5 connector)
ION # 8 (1, 5) (J5 connector) PMT (Fluoro PMT board) (4) (J5 connector)
ION # 9 (1, 5) (J4 connector) Photodiode (PhD)(5) (J6 connector)
Remote AEC(2) (Controller board, J14 pin 10)
Notes:
1. For Pulsed Fluoro only.
2. For Continuous Fluoroscopy only.
3. On Universal Chambers Interface Board P/N 11002.00
4. Select the source for the PMT gain adjustment:
i. Potentiometers located on Fluoro PMT board
ii. Software (uses an internal D/A to set the gain value)
iii. External (J3B, pin 3 on Fluoro PMT board)
When a PMT device is used for both ABS stabilization and AEC control, do not select the
same PMT gain adjust source for Fluoro and RAD. If High Level Fluoro is done, select two
different sources for adjusting the gain, one for low level, the other for high level.
5. On Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro board P/N 11030.000.

4. System Setup
• NOMINAL INPUT: Do not setup the nominal voltage at this moment. Refer to Section 5.5.
• TRIGGER: Adjust the trigger type (mode) and source (if any).
I. Trigger in Continuous Fluoro:
1. If no trigger is used, set the trigger mode to “Internal (Software)” (see below). The
Fluoro starts whenever the exposure ready conditions are met.
2. Continuous Fluoro can also be synchronized with a trigger provided by the camera or
other acquisition device. In this mode, Fluoro is usually started and terminated on a
signal front (Falling or Rising, see below).
3. In continuous Fluoro, it is not recommend to use a “Start rising/or falling, stop timer”
trigger type.
II. Trigger in Pulsed Fluoro:

1. In Pulsed Fluoro, a trigger is mandatory to synchronize the Fluoro pulses. It is
recommended to set the trigger type to “Start rising/or falling, stop timer”.
Trigger mode: Start rising/falling, stop timer Trigger source:
Start rising/falling, stop rising/falling Choose the input pin desired for
Internal (S/W)(i) Fluoro or select “Line” (ii).
i When Internal (S/W) trigger mode is selected, the Epsilon generator will perform
exposures at the operator selected frame rate and exposure parameters and no
external trigger is required.
ii When Line is used for trigger source, the zero crossings of the mains supply are used
to synchronize Fluoro and no external trigger is required.
2. The generator has an operator selected frame rate and will not permit exposures to be
performed any faster than that selected frame rate. If external triggers come at a slower
rate than the selected frame rate, exposures will follow the trigger rate but if triggers
come at a faster rate that selected, then some triggers will be missed.

• ADDITIONAL PULSED FLUORO SETUP: If Pulsed Fluoro is fitted on your generator, perform the
following additional setups.
I. Select the Fluoro mA display mode (Figure 4.18): 1. Average mA; 2. Peak mA.
Peak mA Display Average mA Display

If "mA peak Fluoro display mode" is selected, peak mA values will be displayed on the Epsilon Console together with the
pulse width parameter (ms) during Fluoro.
Figure 4.18 – Pulsed Fluoro mA Display modes.
II. Configure the pulse rate operation (Figure 4.17).

1. Set the pulse rate values using the horizontal selection bars and enable their selections
using the checkbox located at their left. For optimum friendliness, enable only those
pulse rates that will actually be used.
2. If only one pulse rate is available, you can disable the display of the pulse rate on the
operator console in Fluoro by deselecting the "Display F/R" checkbox.
3. If Fluoro pulse rate have to be transmitted to or received from the imaging system,
assign the proper bit configuration for the communication (up to 3 bits).
4. Save the data and send it to the generator (Section 4.2.3).
4.6.2 Fluoro ABS Curves
For the moment, do not adjust the ABS curves. Wait until Section 5.6 to program
the Fluoro kV/mA tracking curves.
4.6.3 Multi-Zoom Fluoro Dose Stabilization
For the moment, do not adjust the ABS stabilization. Wait until Section 5.5 to
program the Fluoro kV/mA tracking curves.

4. System Setup
4.7 APR SETUP

PC TOOLS … VIEW
Done => Options
Done => Workstations
Here… APR
Make sure the options, tube setup, workstations &
Done => Inputs
Fluoro are configured before APR setup is done. Done => Outputs
Done => Fluoro
Done => Tube
APR Technique Chart

The EPS High-Voltage generator has an exceptional voltage ripple of less than 0.5%.
Because less voltage ripple results in greater x-ray beam intensity and penetrability and
better radiation quality, a technique chart developed for a given generator cannot be
transposed directly on an EPS generator. A new technique chart must therefore be
built, with the following idea in mind:
Using an EPS generator, t is possible that for a given mAs, less kV is required
to produce the same radiographic optical density.
The Epsilon APR program uses a node-lattice network to create a hierarchic multi-level exams
database.
You can customize it the way you want, creating and editing nodes at any level. It is worth
remembering that every newly created node has its own set of parameters. Every node corresponds
to an exam. This results in a quick change of the set of parameters during the setup of an APR
exposure in normal utilization mode.
On a first installation, the number of exams corresponds to the number of workstations. The default
parameters are displayed and edited in the right-hand pane for every patient sizes (Figure 4.19).

The Exam setup of the right pane corresponds to the selected node of the APR arborescence
(here, Digital /Spine/LW Ribs, 3rd level node). Each node has its own set of exam parameters.
Figure 4.19 –
APR Programming screen showing a typical APR.
Epsilon APR Program Hints

• It is not recommended to use more than 4 node levels per workstation-APR, as this might
result in too much keystroking to reach a specific exam. A node-level is a node having one
ascending parent on the APR network. Usually, moving between node-levels of a given
workstation is done by hitting as many keys on the Epsilon Console APR menu than there
are levels to pass through.
• Try to limit the number of siblings to 7. A sibling is a node having at least one adjacent
node on the same level. Using too many node-siblings might result in scrolling pages on
the Epsilon Console APR menu.
• Try to locate the most used exams on the lowest APR levels. This will get you through the
desired exam in a minimum of steps.
• Every exam name can be edited using the laptop’s keyboard (select it and press F2 key).
Workstation names can be changed in the workstation screen only (Section 4.5).

4. System Setup
1. Connect the generator to the computer and open the PC Tools configuration file for the
generator.
2. With Epsilon PC Tools in communication mode (Monitor/Transfer), select View/APR to

invoke the APR configuration screen (Figure 4.19). The appearance of the screen varies as a
function of the generator configuration.
Creating a new node (exam)

3. To create a new node, select the workstation that you want to expand and right-click on it.
4. Select New Child. The new node (titled “Exam N”) is placed under the workstation level, in
level position two. The new exam possesses the same APR parameters than its parent. Doing
"New Child" again will result in a new sibling, in level position three. If, instead, you want to add
a second level to the workstation, return to the first level, then use the “New Child” feature
again.
Naming an exam
5. To change the name of a node, select the exam, right-click and choose Rename (or simply use
the F2 key). The focus is brought inside the name zone, and you can now type over a new name
(do not use more than 10 characters).
Exam Deletion
6. The delete an exam, select it and press the delete key or use the right-click menu and choose
"delete".
Any deletion of an exam will erase all exams defined below at inferior levels!
Copy/Paste Exam
7. Use the “Copy and Paste” function to duplicate a full branch of the APR to another branch.
Exam Setup
8. For every exam (node), specify the different parameters that will be defaulted whenever this
exam is selected on the console. This is done by editing the Radiographic Parameters
Configuration pane shown in Figure 4.19.
i. Choose the default exposure mode. If “Disabled” option is selected, no exposure will be
allowed for that APR node. The disabled option can be used to disable the exposure switches
during the APR navigation by the operator.
ii. Select both the frame rate and run length values. If these parameters are not used in the
currently chosen exposure mode, they might come of use if the operator switches the
exposure mode during the exam setup.
iii. Setup the ion chamber (defaulted parameters upon an AEC exam with ion chamber).

iv. According to the selected exposure mode, choose the following tube loading factors by
default: kV, mA, mAs (and mAs ideal time (*)), irradiation time and optical density (**).
(*) mAs Ideal Time = Time value used in mAs exposure (the smallest the time counterpart of the mAs
factor is, the greatest the mA will be).
(**) Optical density = Seven clinically significant optical density corrections are provided with
the EC mode, varying from the standardized optical density N= 1. See Figure 4.20.
Optical density correction (Ion Chamber)

0.57 0.69 0.83 1 1.2 1.45 1.75
75 % 82 % 90 % 100 % 110 % 121 % 133 %

Optical density correction (PMT or Photodiode)
Figure 4.20 – Useful range of optical densities available in AEC mode.
v. Choose the default focus.

vi. Save the default parameters for the current exam.
For Cardiac exam configuration, refer to Technical Manual Supplement

Note that all of the above setups are default parameters only. They can always
be overridden in normal utilization mode by the user.
9. Repeat the exam configuration process for every available node on all workstations.
Use the Copy/Paste feature of the right-mouse button to quickly reproduce an exam set at another place on the
APR tree.
10. Use the File menu to save the APR configuration on the PC. Send the data to the console.

4. System Setup
4.8 CONSOLE, LANGUAGE & TIME SETTINGS
4.8.1 Console Brightness, Contrast and Volume
The Console Setup module is used to adjust the contrast and brightness of the operator console.
1. Put the operator console in service mode and select Console/Setup (Figure 4.21).
2. Adjust the contrast and brightness of the console as desired (Figure 4.21-C). Adjust also the
sound level of the console's alarm and beeping. Press Save selection key to apply new settings.
3. Press Main selection key to return to the main menu.
A B C
Figure 4.21 – Console Setup Menu in Service Mode.

Note: This setup is saved in the operator console and can also be edited using the Epsilon PC
Tools (Generator Configuration File, see Section 7.5.3.4).

4.8.2 Generator Clock

The generator real-time clock is set to GMT -05:00 Eastern Time (US & Canada). Use the History
Log module in Epsilon PC Tools to synchronize the generator clock with your service laptop.
generator.
2. With Epsilon PC Tools in communication mode (Monitor/Transfer), select

Tools/Service/History Log to invoke the History Log module (Figure 4.22).
3. Set Date and Time: Use this button to synchronize the generator clock with the PC.
Figure 4.22 – PC Tools in Service Mode.
4.8.3 Language Module

The Operator Console Language is defaulted to English as main language and French as second
language. The selection of the console language can be made in service mode (Figure 4.23) or in
normal mode (using the User’s Monitor Mode, Section 7.5.2.8). Note that the second language can
be translated to any language by the client himself using the Roman, Greek or Cyrillic alphabet (See
Section 4.8.2.2).

4. System Setup
4.8.3.1 Setting the Operator Console Language

The Console Language module can be used to select the operator console language.
1. Invoke the service mode on the operator console and select Console/Language (Fig. 4.23).
A B C
Figure 4.23 – Operator Console Language Selection in Service Mode.

The Console language can be toggled between English and the second language
by the operator, too. See Section 7.5.2.8.
2. Use the selection key shown in Figure 4.23-C to toggle the active language on the Epsilon
operator console. Press Save selection key to apply the new language selection.
3. Press Main selection key to return to the main menu.
4.8.3.2 Console Language Translation Module

The second language can be translated from English to almost any language by the client himself
using the Epsilon PC Tools “second language” module. Roman (default), Greek and Cyrillic
alphabets are supported as long as the user’s local keyboard settings are compatible with the
character sets.
generator.
2. With Epsilon PC Tools in communication mode (Monitor/Transfer), select View/Second

Language to invoke the language translation screen (Figure 4.24).

Figure 4.24 – Translation Module in Epsilon PC Tools.
3. The following three (3) actions are possible:

i. Create a new second language. This is done by translating the two sets of strings (long
and short strings) from English to the second language.
• For using a non-Western alphabet, in the Menu bar select
View/ Tools/Alphabet and Greek or Cyrillic alphabet
characters set.
• The long strings consist of the complete set of operator messages written in the graphic
screen’s central three rows. The first column of the translator corresponds to the first row
of the message screen, and so on (Figure 4.25). Each row allows up to ten characters for
translation.
• The short strings consist of a certain number of strings made out of a limited number of
characters. This information appears in different places of the graphic screen, at different
moments. Some fields occur only in Service mode, others in normal mode.
ii. Import a second language file from Epsilon PC Tools files. As a second language, the file
“FRENCH.SL” can be loaded for a ready to use French language.
iii. Export a new second language file to your

Epsilon PC Tools files. Once a new language has
been translated (see (i)), let’s say in Spanish, it can
be stored to your Epsilon PC Tools files using the
Export… button. This button leads to a Save As
box in which you would name the file for later use
(in opposite figure, SPANISH.SL).

4. System Setup
Figure 4.25 – Short and Long Strings in the Translation Module.
4. Once a second language has been created or imported (and/or exported), it can be transmitted
to the operator console by saving the emd file (File=>Save or Save as) and transferring the data
to the console (Transfer => Connect=> Send to Generator).
• As long as the alphabet chosen is compatible with the local keyboard setting, the proper
characters should be displayed by both PC Tools and the Epsilon console.
• In Epsilon PC Tools, it is also possible to translate:
o Workstation names in the Workstation configuration screen;
o Interlock names in the Input configuration screen;
o Anatomical region names in the APR configuration screen.

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

5.0 FIELD-CALIBRATION
This chapter describes the final steps before the generator can be operated normally and the user's acceptance
tests (Chapter 6) be performed.
IN THIS CHAPTER :
5.1 INITIAL TURN ON TESTS ...............................................................................................................5-2

5.1.1 Tube Stator Verification ....................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1.1 Epsilon Anode Starter board P/N 9962.xx ..............................................................................5-3
5.1.1.2 EPS Starter board P/N 11104.xxx .............................................................................................5-4
5.1.2 Pre-Calibration Exposure Test .........................................................................................................5-5
5.2 X-RAY TUBE CALIBRATION..........................................................................................................5-6
5.3 EXPOSURE TESTS ..............................................................................................................................5-8

5.3.1 Output kV Waveform........................................................................................................................5-8
5.3.2 mAs Verification.................................................................................................................................5-8
5.4 MAXIMUM FLUOROSCOPIC ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE...........................................5-9

5.4.1 Maximum Entrance Exposure Rate Adjustment...........................................................................5-9
5.4.2 SPD Calibration (Option) ...............................................................................................................5-10
5.4.3 Image Enhancement Mode Calibration (Option)........................................................................5-10
5.5 FLUORO DOSE STABILIZATION (BRIGHTNESS ADJUST)..............................................5-10

5.5.1 Continuous or Standard Pulsed Fluoro.........................................................................................5-10
5.5.1.1 PM Phototube ABS Device.......................................................................................................5-10
5.5.1.2 Photodiode ABS Device ............................................................................................................5-11
5.5.1.3 Ion Chamber or Remote ABS Control....................................................................................5-13
5.5.2 Optional High Performance Pulsed Fluoro .................................................................................5-13
5.6 FLUORO kV/mA TRACKING CURVES (CONTRAST ADJUST) ........................................5-14
5.7 ION CHAMBER SETUP & AEC CALIBRATION .....................................................................5-15

5.7.1 Ion Chamber Setup ..........................................................................................................................5-15
5.7.2 AEC Calibration Procedure ............................................................................................................5-16
5.7.2.1 AEC Calibration Concept..........................................................................................................5-16
A) AEC Feedback Gain Adjustment:............................................................................................5-16
B) Film-Screen Correction (kV Compensation) .........................................................................5-17
5.7.2.2 AEC Chamber’s Fine-Tuning Procedure ................................................................................5-18
5.8 IMAGE BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................................5-20

Most sections of this chapter require the production of X-rays. Make sure to apply
all safety precautions to protect personnel from X-ray radiation.
Make sure the EPS 45-80 High Voltage generator is installed and configured as per the
instructions of Chapters 2, 3 and 4.
REQUIRED MATERIAL
• One copy of the Installation Report (Section 9)
• The Epsilon PC Tools Program with :
o One PC compatible computer running Windows TM
o One RS-232 interlink cable or a standard USB printer cable,
depending on the Epsilon Console version.
• Standard field service tool kit
• One 3½ digit digital multimeter
• Optionally, one 20 MHz dual trace storage oscilloscope with 2 probes
• One mAs meter such as Keithley/Victoreen meters (or equivalent)
• One X-ray dose meter (reading up to 20 Roentgens/min.)
5.1 INITIAL TURN ON TESTS
Perform the following verification and test before calibrating the X-ray tube for the first time.
5.1.1 Tube Stator Verification

Verify which model of Anode Stator board is fitted with the generator. The model number is visible
on the board itself, as can be seen in Figure 5.1, or it can be written on the packing list of the
generator.
Make sure the Anode Starter Board and stator configuration matches the rotor type
of the X-ray tube.
• For Epsilon Anode Starter board P/N 9962.xx, perform Section 5.1.1.1.
• For EPS Starter board P/N 11104.xxx, perform Section 5.1.1.2.

5. Field Calibration
5.1.1.1 Epsilon Anode Starter board P/N 9962.xx

Use the list below to verify that the Anode Starter Board matches the rotor type of the X-ray tube.
Stator types “R” or “S” (NOTE) : Anode Speed Starter P/N 9962.01 (Low speed only)
: Anode Speed Starter P/N 9962.02 (Dual speed)
Stator type “E” : Anode Speed Starter P/N 9962.03
Stator type “XS-R” : Anode Speed Starter P/N 9962.04
Stator type “DT1” : Anode Speed Starter P/N 9962.05
Stator type “TS1” : Anode Speed Starter P/N 9962.06
Figure 5.1(a) – Anode Starter board P/N 9962.xx
NOTE: For R and S standard rotor types only, verify the following dip-switch
configuration (SW1) on the Anode Stator board before doing any exposure. Refer
to the Configuration Table 50 below.
Table 50- Epsilon Anode Starter Board Configuration –I–

Stator Types SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4
“R” type Off (0) Off (0) Off (0) Off (0)
“S” type Off (0) Off (0) Off (0) On (1)
Other types Factory settings: Do not tamper with the switch positions

5.1.1.2 EPS Starter board P/N 11104.xxx
1. Make sure that the EPS Starter Board model fitted on your generator matches your tube rotor
type (Figure 5.1(b)).
EPS Starter board P/N 11104.001 : Low Speed Starter (most common stator types)
EPS Starter board P/N 11104.002 : High Speed Starter (most common stator types)
EPS Starter board P/N 11104.003 : Low Speed Starter, Low Impedance (Q & E Stators)
EPS Starter board P/N 11104.004 : High Speed Starter, Low Impedance (Q & E Stators)
Figure 5.1(b) – Anode Starter board P/N 11104.xxx.
2. Make sure that the configuration of the EPS Starter Board installed with your generator is
appropriate for your tube rotor type. Refer to the Configuration Tables 51 & 52 to adjust, if
necessary, the configuration of the stator type using SW1 dipswitch and the jumper cables (10)
provided with the board. This step requires that the board is first taken out of the generator
upper basket.
Table 51- EPS Starter Board Configuration - II-

Stator Types SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4
“R” Off (0) Off (0) Off (0) Off (0)
“S” Off (0) Off (0) Off (0) On (1)
“XS-R” Off (0) Off (0) On (1) Off (0)
“TS1” Off (0) On (1) On (1) Off (0)
“DT1” Off (0) Off (0) On (1) On (1)
“IAE” Off (0) On (1) On (1) On (1)
“Q” Off (0) On (1) Off (0) On (1)
“E” Off (0) On (1) Off (0) Off (0)

Table 52- EPS Starter Board Configuration –III–

Stator
Jumper configuration for stator types
Types
“R” & “S” B to P C to M D to R E to J F to S G to N
“XS-R”
F to P G to M A to R H to J B to S C to N
“TS1”
“DT1” B to P C to M Q to L I to N F to R G to J A to S H to K D to T
“IAE” F to P G to M I to N Q to L B to J C to R E to O D to S
“Q” B to P C to M D to Q E to N F to R G to J A to S H to K
“E” B to P C to M D to R E to N F to S G to J
Figure 5.2 –
Quick Fit Tabs (A to T) on
Anode Starter board P/N 11104.xxx
5.1.2 Pre-Calibration Exposure Test

Perform the following exposure at low kV & low mA before doing the X-ray tube calibration
(Section 5.2). If a scope is available, verify the kV and main gate waveforms.
1. On the Controller board, connect :

a. Channel 1 of the scope to TP2 test point (Total kV)
b. Channel 2 of the scope to TP17 test point (Main Gate)
c. Reference probe of the scope to TP18 test point (0 VDC).
2. Set up the following 3-point exposure on a workstation.
50 kV @ 10 mA x 200 ms
3. Trigger on the rising edge of channel 2 with a time base of about 40 ms/division.
4. Press the Prep/RAD switch. Verify the exposure parameters on the scope.

5.2 X-RAY TUBE CALIBRATION
The X-ray tube calibration consists for the generator in finding the exact values of filament current
that will produce the different tube mA stations, for the series of kVs. At the same time, the
calibration process ensures that the X-ray tube operating parameters are kept within safe limits.
kW Derating (Small & Large filaments)

The Tube Calibration process does not take into account the tube
kW derating parameter set in the Tube Setup (Section 4.4). Each
filament will be calibrated at 100% of its permissible kW, independently of its derated value. For
sure, after the tube is calibrated, the operating limit for each filament will be derated according
to the kW derating percent be respected normal use of the generator.
1. On the operator console, invoke the service mode by pressing and holding down WS1 and
power on keys. Release WS1 key when the Service mode displays on the console (Figure 5.3-a).
2. Select the Tube Calibration Menu. Verify the veracity of the current tube chart data using
Epsilon PC Tools (Tube Setup menu).
A B C D
Figure 5.3 – Tube Calibration Process in Service Mode.
3. Make sure the tube anode rotation works well (Figure 5.3-b). Select the focus (Figure 5.3-c).
4. Press Prep & RAD footswitch to start the calibration for the selected filament (Figure 5.3-d).
The calibration for each filament is done in two steps, with no user intervention, and takes about
5 minutes. The Prep & RAD switches can be released at any time and the calibration be
concluded later by actuating the exposure switches anew.
5. At the end of a filament calibration, the “Calib. Done” message displays together with the total
exposure time for the calibration. Repeat the process for the other focus.
6. When the calibration is completed for both foci, perform the Exposure test of Section 5.3.

Tube Calibration Messages

- "Press Prep & RAD to begin": The generator is ready to calibrate the selected filament; press the
console exposure buttons (or room footswitch) to start the calibration.
- "Searching Emission": The generator searches for the proper current value that will emit tube
current.
- "Acquiring mA Samples": The generator does exposures and reads mA values.
- "I FIL : X.X Amp ": Display of filament current delivered for the current kV station.
- "Calib Done ": The generator has completed the calibration for the selected filament
- "Calib Aborted ": The operator has cancelled the tube calibration (Cancel key).
- "No emission ": Error message
- "No mA sample ": Error message
Tube Calibration Viewer

It is possible to see the different tube emission calibration curves resulting from a tube calibration.
The different curves represent the plotting of the tube current (in mA) versus tube filament current
(in Amps) for different kV stations. This is done using the Epsilon PC tools module; refer to Section
7.5.3.3.
Figure 5.4 – Tube Calibration Viewer.

5.3 EXPOSURE TESTS
The following exposure tests must be done after an X-ray tube calibration. If a scope is available,
verify the kV and main gate waveforms.
5.3.1 Output kV Waveform

1. On the Controller board, connect :
a. Channel 1 of the scope to TP2 test point (Total kV)
b. Channel 2 of the scope to TP17 test point (Main Gate)
c. Reference probe of the scope to TP18 test point (0 VDC).
2. Set up the following 3-point exposure on a workstation.
100 kV @ 200 mA x 100 ms
3. Trigger on the rising edge of channel 1 with a time base of 20 ms/division.
4. Press the Prep/RAD switch. Verify the exposure parameters on the scope.
5.3.2 mAs Verification

Connect the mAs probes of a mAs meter to the mAs+ (TP15) and mAs– (TP14) test points on the
Controller board.
1. Set-up the following 2-point exposure: 80 kV and 200 mAs.
2. Make an exposure and compare the exposure mAs post-display on the operator console with the
reading of the mAs meter. The mAs value should be 200 ± 10.2 mAs.

5.4 MAXIMUM FLUOROSCOPIC ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE
If this High-Voltage Generator is operated in Fluoroscopic mode, it must be

adjusted to meet the National Regulation in force in the country of installation.
When the generator is installed in United States of America (USA), it must be

conform to the Code of Federal Regulation, 21CFR, Part 1020.32 (d) Entrance
Exposure Rates and (e) Entrance Exposure Rate Limits.
NOTE: If the following adjustment procedure is omitted (§ 5.4.1), Fluoro will be

done using the minimum mA value only.
5.4.1 Maximum Entrance Exposure Rate Adjustment

If your generator is interfaced with a dose tracking device relating to the Source to-Patient distance,
refer to Section 5.4.2.
1. Install the dosimeter in the X-ray beam path, at the exact stipulated distance from the image
intensifier. Make sure that the beam-limiting device is fully open.
2. On the operator console, invoke the service mode by pressing and holding down WS1 and
power on keys. Release WS1 key when the service mode displays on the console (Figure 5.5-a).
3. Select Fluoro calibration and Dose Maximum calibration module (Figure 5.5-b).
A B C D
Figure 5.5 – Fluoro Maximum Entrance Exposure Rate Adjustment Module in Service Mode.
4. Select Fluoro Low level (Figure 5.5-c).

5. Do Fluoro and use the dosimeter to measure the fluoroscopic entrance rate. With the console
mA up & down keys, adjust the mA (Continuous Fluoro) or mAs/pulse (Pulsed Fluoro) until
the desired fluoroscopic entrance rate is obtained for Fluoro Low Level. Repeat the dose
adjustment for the High Level Fluoro.
6. Use the Save button (Figure 5.5-d) to store the mA or mAs/pulse value. The “Value Saved”
message displays. Press “Main” to continue or “Exit” to quit.

5.4.2 SPD Calibration (Option)
For SPD calibration, refer to Technical Manual Supplement P/N 11050.012 in

the electronic documentation CD.
5.4.3 Image Enhancement Mode Calibration (Option)

If Image Enhancement feature is enabled on your generator, it must be calibrated to verify that the
average patient dose does not exceed the dose allowed by local regulations.
For Image Enhancement mode configuration, refer to Technical Manual

Supplement P/N 11050.012 in the electronic documentation CD.
5.5 FLUORO DOSE STABILIZATION (BRIGHTNESS ADJUST)
ABS Feedback Gain Adjustment: The end of a frame in Pulsed Fluoro is detected when the
voltage ramping at the ABS feedback input reaches the nominal input value. In continuous Fluoro, a
voltage level is taken into account instead of a voltage ramp.
To adjust the Fluoro image stabilization, perform either procedure 5.5.1 or procedure 5.5.2
according to the equipment interfaced to the generator.
− Use § 5.5.1 to adjust the Fluoro Dose stabilization in Continuous or Standard Pulsed Fluoro;
− Use § 5.5.2 to adjust the Fluoro Dose stabilization in High Performance Pulsed Fluoro.
5.5.1 Continuous or Standard Pulsed Fluoro

5.5.1.1 PM Phototube ABS Device
1. Put the operator console in service mode (Figure 5.6, -A-).
2. Select Fluoro calibration, Dose Stabilization and Low Level (Figure 5.6, B and C).
3. Press the Low Level Fluoro footswitch and adjust the Fluoro image using the appropriate
Fluoro stabilizer device (Table 53):
• Using a D/A device: With the Epsilon Console in service mode, manually set the gain
of the PMT from 1 thru 100%. Press [Save] selection key when done (Figure 5.6-D).
• Using a potentiometer: Turn the proper potentiometer on the Fluoro PMT board.
Increasing (clockwise) the phototube sensitivity will decrease the image brightness.
Decreasing (counter-clockwise) the phototube sensitivity will increase the image
brightness.

-A- -B- -C- -D-
Figure 5.6 – Fluoro Dose Stabilization Adjustment with a

Photomultiplier Tube ABS Device, done in Service Mode.
4. If High Fluoro level is fitted on your generator, return to screen of Figure 5.6-C, select High
Fluoro Level and repeat step 3.
Table 53- Fluoro ABS Adjustment

Fluoroscopy ABS Adjustment for PMT device (Board 9822.00)
Gain Control (*) Adjustment
D/A device Use the console in service mode to set the proper gain of the PMT.
Potentiometer R7, R8, R10, R11 or R16:
Select the appropriate potentiometer to adjust the gain of the Fluoro pickup device.
Fluoro Low Level Potentiometer : R _____
Fluoro High Level Potentiometer : R _____
J3B-3 External brightness control (No adjustment on the generator).
(*) The gain control is selected using Epsilon PC Tools, in Fluoro Setup (see Section 4.6)
5.5.1.2 Photodiode ABS Device

1. Open the configuration file for your generator by using PC Tools program. Put the generator-
PC communication in Monitor mode.
2. Select View/Fluoro/General Fluoro Setup window.
3. Make sure photodiode is selected for the Fluoro feedback device. Set the gain level(s) for the
feedback device by adjusting the nominal input with the corresponding cursor (Low & High
levels, if applicable).
4. Save the configuration file and send it to the generator.
5. Perform Fluoro and verify the Fluoro image stabilization.

6. If necessary, repeat steps 3 thru 5 until the Fluoro image is good.

Note: The photodiode gain on J6 can be made lower (ABS ramp slow), if
necessary, by moving the jumper on J10 connector:
Position 1-2: Normal gain for photodiode
Position 2-3: Low gain for photodiode (Slow ramp ABS)
FLUORO
1.
4.
3.
2.
Nominal Input H/W Gain Adjust Jumper

From 12.5 mV to 9.3 V J10, 1-2 : Normal gain
J10, 2-3 : Low gain (slow ramp)
Figure 5.7 – Fluoro Dose Stabilization Adjustment with a Photodiode ABS Device.

5.5.1.3 Ion Chamber or Remote ABS Control

For ABS control using an ion chamber (Pulsed Fluoro) or a flat panel (continuous Fluoro), the
Fluoro stabilization procedure is done by adjusting the gain of the ABS feedback signal (nominal
input voltage) in the Fluoro screen of the Epsilon PC Tools program. Before adjusting the gain in
Fluoro, it is recommended to set the ion chamber first. Refer to Section 5.7 for detail.
1. Connect the generator to the PC and launch the Epsilon PC Tools program.
2. Open the configuration file for your generator. Use View menu to invoke the Fluoro
configuration screen. Click on General Fluoro Setup tab.
3. Use a field procedure to adjust the nominal input voltage for Low Level Fluoro that will
provide optimum Fluoro image brightness. Save the data and send it to the generator.
4. Do Fluoro and verify the image brightness. Repeat the procedure for High Level Fluoro, if fitted
on the generator.
Ion Chamber ABS Device (Pulsed Fluoro only)
1.
FLUORO
4.
2. 3.
Nominal Input
From 0.1 to 10 V
Figure 5.8 – Fluoro Dose Stabilization Adjustment with an Ion Chamber in Pulsed Fluoro.
5.5.2 Optional High Performance Pulsed Fluoro
To adjust the image stabilization in High Performance Pulsed Fluoro, refer to

Technical Manual Supplement P/N 11050.012 in the electronic documentation CD.

5.6 FLUORO kV/mA TRACKING CURVES (CONTRAST ADJUST)
In Fluoro ABS, the Epsilon RF generator uses a kV to mA tracking curve to set the Fluoro mA as a
function of the kV variation. Four (4) different curves are provided, ABS1 thru ABS4, to be
customized as per your Fluoro application (Figure 5.9). The quality of Fluoro contrast can be judged
by the amount of blacks and whites on the picture and is determined by the proportion of mA
forming the fluoroscopic X-ray beam.
Each ABS curve is built from five points from 40 to 125 kV on the X-axis, and percent of maximum
mA on the Y-axis. Of the five kV points, only the middle 3 kV stations can be edited (40 and 125
kV stations are fixed). The maximum mA allowed starts at 100 % at the maximum 125 kV, and can
be raised or lowered at the inferior kV stations. The program will not let you programming a
kV/mA curve too steep that would compromise the Fluoro stabilization.
2. Open the configuration file for your generator. Select View/Fluoro/ABS Curves Setup window
(Figure 5.9).
Figure 5.9 – Fluoro ABS Curves Editor in Epsilon PC Tools.
3. For ABS1, select the three middle kV stations to set the points of inflection of the curve.
4. For every kV station, set the percent of the maximum mA. As you drag the mA % horizontal
cursor (or click on the right/left arrows for smaller increments), the curve is redrawn
automatically in the Fluoro kV-mA tracking curves zone.
5. Repeat the drawing process for every ABS curve that you will use in Fluoro.
ABS2 through ABS4 curves can be disabled, if not used. A disabled ABS curve will not be
available on the operator console.

5.7 ION CHAMBER SETUP & AEC CALIBRATION
The following sections describe how to setup the ion chamber and calibrate the AEC mode using
the Epsilon PC Tools program.
5.7.1 Ion Chamber Setup

1. Connect the generator to the PC and launch the Epsilon PC Tools program. Open the
configuration file for your generator.
2. Make sure the proper ion chamber is selected for the

current workstation. All workstations have their own
setup for the field selection and film-screen correction
(opposite figure). If necessary, refer to Section 4.5 for
proper configuration.
3. Refer to the manufacturer specifications to setup the ion chamber control voltage and signal
polarity (Epsilon PC tools: View => AEC Chambers/Hardware tab, Figure 5.10, left):
• Control Voltage: Operating voltage used for the field selection and integrator reset of the
ion chamber. The control voltage (V-Out High) can be adjusted from 4 to 24 VDC.
• Signal polarity: Depending on the logic used for the activation of the ion chamber reset
and field select signals, choose the proper polarity using the Reset Polarity and Field Enable
Polarity radio buttons. Refer to Figure 5.11 for two examples of field selection configuration.
4. Save the data and send it to the generator.
AEC Chambers Setup

Hardware Tab
(See also Figure 5.11)
AEC Chamber Fine Tuning screen
Figure 5.10 – Ion Chamber Setup & AEC Calibration.

Field # A Field # B Field # C Field Selection
Active-Low Field Select Polarity; 14.5 VDC 14.5 VDC 14.5 VDC Not used
Control Voltage set to 14.5 VDC
0 VDC 14.5 VDC 14.5 VDC
14.5 VDC 0 VDC 14.5 VDC
0 VDC 0 VDC 14.5 VDC
14.5 VDC 14.5 VDC 0 VDC

0 VDC 14.5 VDC 0 VDC
14.5 VDC 0 VDC 0 VDC
0 VDC 0 VDC 0 VDC
0 VDC 0 VDC 0 VDC Not used
Control Voltage set to 10 VDC
10 VDC 0 VDC 0 VDC

Active-High Field Select
0 VDC 10 VDC 0 VDC

Polarity;
10 VDC 10 VDC 0 VDC
0 VDC 0 VDC 10 VDC

10 VDC 0 VDC 10 VDC
0 VDC 10 VDC 10 VDC
10 VDC 10 VDC 10 VDC
Figure 5.11 – Field Selection Table for two (2) different Ion Chamber Setups. Note that the above values are
given as examples only and do not correspond to recommended figures for a default ion chamber.
5.7.2 AEC Calibration Procedure

5.7.2.1 AEC Calibration Concept
A) AEC Feedback Gain Adjustment:
The end of an AEC exposure is detected at the AEC feedback input. The calibration process mainly
consists in determining the voltage level read at the generator’s AEC sensor input that will
correspond to the desired optical density or AEC brightness. This voltage value is set using the
Nominal Input in PC Tools (PC Tools/View/AEC Chambers, Figure 5.10, right), for each of the 3
film/screen combinations. The AEC signal allows for a maximum of 10 VDC ramp at the AEC
feedback input.
The AEC calibration requires that the voltage level should be Examples of AEC Gain
adjusted for a neutral density and no film correction (see Nominal Input AEC Gain
procedure in Section 5.7.2.2). The nominal input figure applies 0.1 V 1/10
1.0 V 1
independently for each of the three film-screen combinations.
10 V 10

For an ion chamber, the effect of the film-screen correction is additive to the effect of the AEC
feedback gain. See Table 54 and description in the following paragraph (B. Film-Screen Correction).
B) Film-Screen Correction (kV Compensation)

Three (3) programming film-screen correction tables are provided to compensate for the kV curve
characteristics of the ion chamber (Figure 5.10 right, Slow, Medium and Fast). The correction factor
is set independently for 12 different kV stations (42 kV, 46 kV, …, 117 kV and 133 kV) from -80%
up to +130% of the photo-timing level. Correction factors for the remaining kV stations are
interpolated (and extrapolated) from the curve drawn from the above 12 points.
The compensation effect of the correction factor applies in shortening or lengthening the end of the
exposure in the following manner:
Correction for kVn = 100% (1 + "Factor kVn"/100).
Examples are given below in Table 54. Refer to Section 5.7.2.2 for the adjustment procedure of the
film-screen correction.
Table 54- Effect of AEC gain and Gain of AEC Feedback

Film-Screen correction (Film-screen-related)
Effect of Correction Factor on A. B.

AEC Exposure duration (density) Optimum density at 1 V Optimum density at 2 V
1. Correction for 42 kV = -80 …. Effect (*)
Combined….
100% (1 + - 80/100) = 20%

1.A 1.B
The AEC exposure at 42 kV will stop
at one fifth the nominal voltage input. Exp. stops when voltage Exp. stops when voltage
at AEC sensor = 0.2 V at AEC sensor = 0.4 V
2. Correction for 66 kV = None 2.A 2.B
100% (1 + 0/100) = 100%
The AEC exposure at 66 kV will stop Exp. stops when voltage Exp. stops when voltage
at its nominal voltage input. at AEC sensor = 1.0 V at AEC sensor = 2.0 V
3 Correction for 117 kV = +130 3.A 3.B

100% (1 + 130/100) = 230%
The AEC exposure at 117 kV will stop Exp. stops when voltage Exp. stops when voltage
at 2.3 times the nominal voltage input. at AEC sensor = 2.3 V at AEC sensor = 4.6 V
(*) The combined action of AEC gain and film-screen correction is effective up to 10 VDC. For AEC
calibration superior to that level, the exposure will still end at 10 VDC.

5.7.2.2 AEC Chamber’s Fine-Tuning Procedure

In this procedure, the optimum film density level is obtained in AEC mode by adjusting the voltage
level at which the AEC exposure will be stopped (intermittent exposure). To do this, the feedback
signal provided by the ion chamber is considered from the generator standpoint. It is important that
this level should always be adjusted for a neutral density and no film correction.
Equipment Required
- A clean flat-bottom plastic bucket, with a minimum diameter of 6”, which can be filled with
up to 14" of water. The bucket must be leveled.
- An X-ray densitometer capable of measuring optical film density from 0.5 to 2.5 with accuracy
of ± 0.05 O.D.
Procedure
2. Open the configuration file for your generator. Use View menu to invoke the AEC Setup
module (Figure 5.10).
i. Select the proper ion chamber (# 1 or 2) and choose one of the three film-screen speeds.
ii. Set the nominal input voltage for that film-screen to 5.0 V.
iii. Set the correction factor for 81 kV at 0 (no correction).
iv. Set the optical density to “N” (optimum).
4. On the operator console, setup the following AEC-mA exposure:

81 kV, 250 mA, 1 second B.U.T.
100% optical density, large focal spot, middle field and film-screen speed as selected in step 2.
5. Select the higher grid ratio available on the ion chamber.
6. Place the water phantom (filled with 3" of water) in the center field of the ion chamber, with a
SID of about 36".
7. With no X-ray film and a strong collimation, perform an A.E.C. exposure and adjust the water
level inside the bucket so that the exposure time falls between 100 and 300 ms.
8. Insert the film-screen cassette and repeat the same A.E.C. exposure with the same water level
used in the previous step. Process the film and verify that the optical density of the exposed film
corresponds to the desired density (ex. 1.0 ± 0.1).

9. If the proper optical density is not achieved, adjust the Nominal input voltage for the current
film-screen speed. Save the data and send it to the generator. Repeat the same 81 kV-exposure.
Note: Once the desired optical density is obtained for the 81-kV exposure with the current film-
screen speed, the remaining eleven kV stations will be adjusted using the film-screen factor only
(from -80 to + 130), and Nominal input voltage should not be moved.
Ion Chamber Gain Adjustment: If the density correction is below 120 % or above 149 %, the gain of the
ion chamber must be adjusted. The ion chamber gain adjustment must be performed once only.
To adjust the gain of the ion chamber, repeat the same A.E.C. exposure at 81 kV and the factor of 0 % and
change the gain value of the ion chamber until the desired optical density is achieved.
10. With the same water level used in step 7, perform an A.E.C. exposure at 42 kV and find the
appropriate correction factor (from -80 to + 130) until the desired optical density of the exposed
film is achieved.
Remember to save the data and send it to the generator before doing an exposure whenever the
film-screen correction factor is adjusted!
Hint: Use the following formula as indicative means to correct the density % for a given kV station.
11. Repeat the process for the remaining kV stations.
12. Repeat steps 2 thru 10 for a second film-screen speed, if used with the current ion chamber.
Adjust first the Nominal input voltage for the 81-kV exposure, and then, proceed with all kV
stations by adjusting only the film-screen factor. In step 4, don't forget to change the film-screen
speed to the new one.
13. Repeat the procedure for the last film-screen speed, if necessary. Repeat the procedure for the
second ion chamber, if any.

5.8 IMAGE BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT
This section applies only to generators not using an Ion chamber as AEC sensor.
On certain workstations, the generator might be interfaced with a photomultiplier tube to control
the image brightness in AEC exposures. The image brightness is in direct relation with the gain of
the photomultiplier tube (PMT) controlled by the high voltage supply adjusted by a dedicated
potentiometer or a D/A device on the Fluoro PMT board.
1. Select a workstation using a PMT for AEC exposure.
2. Setup an AEC exposure on the operator console.
3. Press RAD and adjust the image brightness using either i) a potentiometer on the Fluoro PMT
board (Figure 5.12) or ii) a gain set by a D/A set in service mode (console).
i) Turn the proper potentiometer on the Fluoro PMT board.
i. Increasing (clockwise) the phototube sensitivity will decrease the image brightness.
ii. Decreasing (counter-clockwise) the phototube sensitivity will increase the image
brightness.
ii) Use the Epsilon Console in Service mode to set the proper gain of the D/A device.
4. If necessary, repeat the procedure for the remaining workstations.
Gain Control (*) Adjustment

Potentiometer R7, R8, R10, R11 or R16:
Select the appropriate potentiometer to adjust the RAD brightness of the pickup
device: W.S. ________ R _____
W.S. ________ R _____
Turn the selected potentiometer to adjust the gain:
- Increasing the phototube sensitivity (clockwise) will decrease the image
brightness.
- Decreasing (counter-clockwise) the phototube sensitivity will increase the
image brightness.
D/A device Use the console in service mode to set the proper gain of the PMT.
Remote AEC Not used
(*) The gain control is selected using Epsilon PC Tools, in Workstation Setup (see Section 4.3)
Figure 5.12 – AEC Adjustment.

6.0 USER ACCEPTANCE TESTS
This section sets forth the acceptance testing criteria that should be used to determine compliance of
the Epsilon High-Voltage generator with the general performance requirements of the
manufacturer. It is not intended to provide complete conformance evidence for all applicable
regulatory requirements.
The testing procedure applies to the final generator, that is, to the generator that has been assembled,
installed, programmed and calibrated as per the instructions given in this manual, Sections 2 thru 5.
PRE-REQUISITE CHECKUP
• Make sure the Epsilon generator is installed as per Chapters 2 & 3 of this manual.
• Make sure the Epsilon generator is setup and calibrated as per Chapters 4 & 5 of this
manual.
• Make sure the Installation Report is completed as per Chapter 9 of this manual.
TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS

ABS : Automatic Brightness Stabilization, in Fluoro mode. Mode of operation in which the
factors of the Fluoroscopic beam is automatically adjusted to obtain optimal image
brightness.
AEC : Automatic Exposure Control, in RAD mode
In an X-ray Generator, mode of operation in which one or more loading factors are controlled automatically in
order to obtain at a preselected location a desired quantity of radiation (1)
kV : Peak voltage applied between the anode and cathode of an x-ray tube, in thousands of
volts.
kW : Describes the product of both kV and mA output at the generator or loaded at the
terminals of the X-ray tube.
mA : Average x-ray tube current, in milliamperes, during the irradiation time. The operator
console can also display the peak mA rather than the average mA, during the optional
Pulsed Fluoro, if the user does want so.
mAs : X-ray tube current by time product (mA x Time), in milliamperes-seconds
SPD : Source to Patient Distance
Time : Irradiation time, in milliseconds (ms) or seconds (s). Irradiation time represents the time
interval between the instant that the tube potential has risen for the first time to a value
of 80% and the instant at which it finally drops below the same value.
WKS : Workstation (or image receptor). Transducer device that converts the X-ray beam energy
across the patient into visible images.

6.1 OPERATOR CONSOLE ACCEPTANCE TEST
Acceptance Test Logbook (1/11)

1. Press the power on key on the Operator Console. Verify that the generator Refer to § 4.5
initializes correctly:
With the default workstation OK ; NO
With the default loading factors. OK ; NO
2. Verify that every enabled workstation is active;
Check the workstation name; A. W.S. LED
Check the workstation LED Indicator; OK ; NO
Check that Fluoro enabled workstation(s) is (are) active;
B. W.S. name
OK ; NO
B
C. Fluoro W.S.
A
OK ; NO
3. Verify that :
The X-ray tube selection is functional; OK ; NO
The focal spot selection is functional; OK ; NO
The APR selection is functional. OK ; NO
4. Choose a serial exposure mode workstation:
a) Verify that the frame rate selection is functional; OK ; NO
b) Verify that the run length selection is functional. OK ; NO
5. Set the console in 2 or 3-pt mode:
a) Verify that mAs key toggles between 2-point & 3-point mode; OK ; NO
a1. Verify Parameter keys up & down action:
kV, mA and time in 3-pt mode and mAs in 2-pt mode. OK ; NO
a2. Verify the mA, mAs, ms and s indicators. OK ; NO
b) Verify that AEC key toggles between AEC and 2/3-point mode. OK ; NO
6. Set the console in AEC mode:
a) Verify that the AEC indicator lights green; OK ; NO
b) Verify that the ion chamber setup keys are functional; OK ; NO
c) Verify the density up & down keys action. OK ; NO
7. Press the power off key (the generator must turn off). OK ; NO
Initials: _____

6. User Acceptance Tests
6.2 ACCURACY OF LOADING FACTORS
Test Equipment
Use the following calibrated measurement devices:
• Non-invasive or invasive kV meters
• mA/mAs meter
• X-ray Dose Meter
6.2.1 kV Accuracy
1. Perform the following 3-point exposures (3) using the loading factors of Table 55
Table 55 and verify the accuracy of the tube kV (intermittent mode). The
error of the measured X-ray Tube Voltage of the different loading factors Passed
combination shall not be greater than ± (5% + 2 kV). Failed
2. Do Fluoro using the loading factors of Table 56 and verify the accuracy of Table 56
the tube kV in continuous mode. The error of the measured X-ray Tube
Voltage of the different loading factors combination shall not be greater Passed
than ± (5% + 2 kV). Failed
Table 55- Tube kV Accuracy (Intermittent mode)

Requested Conditions Highest Shortest
Lowest kV Compliance Criteria
Exposure 1 available mA Time
Select 40 kV 40 kV ± (5% + 2 kV) ____ mA 1.0 ms
Measure ____ kV Test Passed Test Failed

Requested Conditions Highest Time
Lowest kV Compliance Criteria
Exposure 2 available mA (≅ 100 ms)
Select 40 kV 40 kV ± (5% + 2 kV) ____ mA 100 ms

Highest kV Compliance Criteria
Exposure 3 available mA (≅ 100 ms)
Select ____ kV ___ kV ± (5% + 2 kV) ____ mA 100 ms
Initials: _____

Table 56- Tube kV Accuracy (Continuous mode)

Requested Conditions
90% kV MAX Compliance Criteria Any mA
Exposure 1
Select ____ kV ___ kV ± (5% + 2 kV) ____ mA

60% kV MAX Compliance Criteria Any mA
Exposure 2
Select ____ kV ___ kV ± (5% + 2 kV) ____ mA
6.2.2 mA Accuracy

1. Perform the following 3-point exposures (3) using the loading factors of Table 57
Table 57 and verify the accuracy of the tube mA (Intermittent mode). Passed
Failed
2. Do Fluoro using the loading factors of Table 58 and verify the accuracy of Table 58
the tube mA in continuous mode. Passed
Failed
Table 57- Tube mA Accuracy (Intermittent mode)

Requested Conditions Shortest
Lowest mA Compliance Criteria Highest kV
Exposure 1 Time
Select 10.0 10 mA ± (5% + 0.5 mA) ____ kV ____ ms
Measure ____ mA Test Passed Test Failed

Requested Conditions Time
Lowest mA Compliance Criteria Highest kV
Exposure 2 (≅ 100 ms)
Select 10.0 10 mA ± (5% + 0.5 mA) ____ kV ____ ms

Highest mA Compliance Criteria
Exposure 3 available kV (≅ 100 ms)
Select ____ mA ___ mA ± (5% + 0.5 mA) ____ kV ____ ms
Initials: _____

Table 58- Tube mA Accuracy (Continuous mode)

20% mA MAX Compliance Criteria Lowest kV
Exposure 1
Select ____ mA ___ mA ± (5% + 0.5 mA) ____ kV

20% mA MAX Compliance Criteria Highest kV
Exposure 2
Select ____ mA ___ mA ± (5% + 0.5 mA) ____ kV
6.2.3 mAs Accuracy

Perform the two mAs exposures (2) using the loading factors of Table 59 and Table 59
verify the accuracy of the tube mAs. Passed
Failed
Table 59- Tube mAs Accuracy (Intermittent mode)

Lowest mAs Compliance Criteria Highest kV
Exposure 1
Select 0.4 mAs 0,4 mAs ± (5% + 0,2 mAs) ____ kV
Measure ____ mAs Test Passed Test Failed

Highest mAs Compliance Criteria Lowest kV
Exposure 2
Select ____ mAs ___ mAs ± (5% + 0,2 mAs) 40 kV
Measure ____ mAs Test Passed Test Failed
Initials: _____

6.2.4 Irradiation Time Accuracy

Perform the following 3-point exposures (2) using the loading factors of Table 60 Table 60
and verify the accuracy of the irradiation time measured at 80 % of the peak kV. Passed
Failed
Table 60- Irradiation Time Accuracy

Result of test Highest kV Any mA
Exposure 1 Time
Select 1.0 ms 1.0 ms ± (5% + 0.2 ms) ____ kV ____ mA
Measure ____ ms Test Passed Test Failed

Result of test Highest Electrical Power
Exposure 2 Time
Select 1.0 ms 1.0 ms ± (5% + 0.2 ms) ____ kV ____ mA
Measure ____ ms Test Passed Test Failed
Initials: _____

6.3 REPRODUCIBILITY OF LOADING FACTORS
This test verifies the reproducibility of the radiation output of the generator.
Test Equipment
The following material is required to
X-Ray Tube
perform Section 6.3.
• X-ray Dosimeter
• Aluminum Attenuator
• Calculator Collimator
SID
Test Setup (Figure 6.1) and Protocol 135 cm Al Attenuator
1. Set the SID to about 135 cm.
2. Make 10 successive irradiations in less
than an hour, at the loading factors of
Table 61, column A. Do the exposure
shots at the same focal spot.
Ion Chamber (used for AEC
3. To simulate the presence of a patient shots only)
during the test, use an aluminum Radiation Probe
attenuator of sufficient size to intercept
the whole of the X-ray beam. Figure 6.1 – Setup for Sections 6.3 thru 6.6.
See Table 61 for attenuation thickness.
4. Repeat the test three more times, using the loading factors and attenuation thicknesses of
columns B, C & D.
NOTE: If the linearity tests of section 6.4 are intended, it is better to proceed with the
following tests sequence: A, B, C, E, D and F for more straightforward manipulations. These
tests correspond to Result Tables 6A, 6B, 6C, 7A, 6D and 7B.
Table 61- Test for verifying reproducibility

Test setting A B C D
X-ray Tube Voltage Lowest Highest 50% of 80% of
highest highest
X-ray Tube Current or Highest Lowest Giving between
Current Time product 1µGy – 5 µGy
Irradiation Time Between 0.01 s and 0.32 s for all settings
Aluminum Attenuation 4 mm Al 44 mm Al 24 mm Al 40 mm Al
Result Calculations 1/2

The coefficient of variation C of the measured Absorbed Doses (see ⎡ n 2⎤
opposite formula) for every set of 10 exposure shots (intermittent C = 1 ⎢∑ ( Xi − X )⎥
mode) shall not be greater than 0.05. See Tables 62 through 65. X ⎣ i =1 n-1 ⎦
C = Coefficient of variation; X = Absorbed dose
n = Number of exposures = 10; X = Average absorbed dose
Initials: _____

Table 62- Reproducibility Test A - Results

Acceptance Test Logbook (6A/11)
Requested
Conditions Test A
Lowest kV Highest mA 10 ms ≤ T ≤ 320 ms
Attenuation:
LOADING 4 mm Al
40 kV ___ mA ___ ms
FACTORS
Measure Calculate , , , , and

2
Dose Xi ( Xi − X ) ( Xi − X )
Standard Deviation
Exp. shot 1
n
∑ (X − X )
2
Exp. shot 2 i =1
i
n-1
Exp. shot 3
Exp. shot 4
s=
Exp. shot 5
Exp. shot 6
Reproducibility
Exp. shot 7
n
∑ (X − X )
2
Exp. shot 8 i =1
i
n-1
C=
Exp. shot 9 X
Exp. shot 10
∑ (X − X ) c=
2
X = i
=
i =1
If c < 0.05 => Test Passed If c > 0.05 => Test Failed
Initials: _____

Table 63- Reproducibility Test B – Results

Acceptance Test Logbook (6B/11)
Requested
Conditions Test B
Highest kV Lowest mA 10 ms ≤ T ≤ 320 ms
Attenuation:
LOADING 44 mm Al
___ kV 10 mA ___ ms
FACTORS

2
Standard Deviation
Exp. shot 1
n
∑ (X − X )
2
Exp. shot 2 i =1
i
n-1
Exp. shot 3
Exp. shot 4
s=
Exp. shot 5
Exp. shot 6
Reproducibility
Exp. shot 7
n
∑ (X − X )
2
Exp. shot 8 i =1
i
n-1
C=
Exp. shot 9 X
Exp. shot 10
∑ (X − X ) c=
2
X = i
=
i =1
Initials: _____

Table 64- Reproducibility Test C – Results

Acceptance Test Logbook (6C/11)
Requested mA for
Conditions Test C
50% kV MAX
100 µR < Dose < 500 µR 10 ms ≤ T ≤ 320 ms
Attenuation:
LOADING 24 mm Al
___ kV ___ mA ___ ms
FACTORS

2
Standard Deviation
Exp. shot 1
n
∑ (X − X )
2
Exp. shot 2 i =1
i
n-1
Exp. shot 3
Exp. shot 4
s=
Exp. shot 5
Exp. shot 6
Reproducibility
Exp. shot 7
n
∑ (X − X )
2
Exp. shot 8 i =1
i
n-1
C=
Exp. shot 9 X
Exp. shot 10
∑ (X − X ) c=
2
X = i
=
i =1
Initials: _____

Table 65- Reproducibility Test D – Results

Acceptance Test Logbook (6D/11)
Requested mA for
Conditions Test D
80% kV MAX
100 µR < Dose < 500 µR 10 ms ≤ T ≤ 320 ms
Attenuation:
LOADING 40 mm Al
___ kV ___ mA ___ ms
FACTORS

2
Standard Deviation
Exp. shot 1
n
∑ (X − X )
2
Exp. shot 2 i =1
i
n-1
Exp. shot 3
Exp. shot 4
s=
Exp. shot 5
Exp. shot 6
Reproducibility
Exp. shot 7
n
∑ (X − X )
2
Exp. shot 8 i =1
i
n-1
C=
Exp. shot 9 X
Exp. shot 10
∑ (X − X ) c=
2
X = i
=
i =1
Initials: _____

6.4 LINEARITY OF LOADING FACTORS
This test verifies the linearity of the radiation output of the generator.
Test Equipment
The following material is required to perform Section 6.4. Refer also to Figure 6.1.
• X-ray Dosimeter
• Aluminum Attenuator
• Calculator
Protocol
1. Use the same setup than Section 6.3.
2. Make 10 successive irradiations in less than an hour, at the loading factors of Table 66, column
E. To simulate the presence of a patient during the test, use an aluminum attenuator of sufficient
size to intercept the whole of the X-ray beam.
3. Repeat the test using the loading factors and attenuation thicknesses of column F.
Table 66- Tests for verifying linearity (see also Table 61)
Test setting E F
X-ray Tube Voltage 50% of highest 80% of highest
X-ray Tube Current or Two mA stations above Two mA stations above
Current Time product test C test D
Irradiation Time Between 0.01 s and 0.32 s for the two settings
Aluminum Attenuation 24 mm Al 40 mm Al
Result Calculations
X1 X2
The Absorbed Doses for the 10 exposure shots shall not differ by mAs1 mAs2
more than 0.1 for the combination of loading factors of Table 66 < 0.1
X1 X2 (
(Linearity tests E & F). See opposite formula. (mAs1+ mAs2
X1 = Average of the measured Doses for Test C (or D)
X2 = Average of the measured Doses for Test E (or F)
mAs1 = Current time product for loading factors of Test C (or D)

mAs2 = Current time product for loading factors of Test E (or F)
Initials: _____

Table 67- Linearity Test E – Results

Acceptance Test Logbook (7A/11)
Requested 2 mA stations
As Test 6C 10 ms < T < 320 ms
Conditions Test E above Test 6C
Attenuation:
LOADING 24 mm Al
___ kV ___ mA ___ ms
FACTORS
Measure and : Calculate , , , and
Dose XEi mAs2
Exp. shot 1
Exp. shot 2
Exp. shot 3
Dose/mAs (Test C): Dose/mAs (Test E):
Exp. shot 4
XC XE
mAs1 = mAs2 =
Exp. shot 5
Exp. shot 6
Linearity "L" :
Exp. shot 7
Exp. shot 8 XC − XE
mAs1 mAs2
< 0.1
XC + XE
Exp. shot 9 mAs1 mAs2
Exp. shot 10
Xe = mAs2 = L=
If "L" < 0.1 => Test Passed If "L" > 0.1 => Test Failed
Initials: _____

Table 68- Linearity Test F – Results

Acceptance Test Logbook (7B/11)
Requested 2 mA stations
As Test 6D 10 ms < T < 320 ms
Conditions Test F above Test 6D Attenuation:
LOADING 40 mm Al
___ kV ___ mA ___ ms
FACTORS
Measure and : Calculate , , , and
Dose XFi mAs2
Exp. shot 1
Exp. shot 2
Exp. shot 3
Dose/mAs (Test D): Dose/mAs (Test F):
Exp. shot 4
Xd Xf
mAs1 = mAs2 =
Exp. shot 5
Exp. shot 6
Linearity "L" :
Exp. shot 7
Exp. shot 8 Xd − X f
mAs1 mAs2
< 0.1
Xd + X f
Exp. shot 9 mAs1 mAs 2
Exp. shot
10
Xf = mAs2 = L=
If "L" < 0.1 => Test Passed If "L" > 0.1 => Test Failed
Initials: _____

6.5 CONSTANCY OF AEC MODE
Use the following test to demonstrate the constancy of the AEC mode during direct radiography.
Test Equipment
The following material is required to perform Section 6.5.
• 12 identical films and cassette; or an X-ray dosimeter(*)
• Water phantom (or equivalent)
• Ion Chamber compatible with Epsilon generator
Protocol
Test performed by: ______________________________
Date: _________ Beginning of Test Time: _________ End of Test Time: _________
1. Use the test setup of Section 6.3 (Figure 6.1). N/A

2. Make a series of 12 AEC irradiations at the loading factors and attenuation
Table 69
thickness of Table 69 and measure the optical densities of each radiograph (*).
3. Calculate the AEC consistency for the different operative conditions grouped Passed
in Tables 70 through 74. Failed
(*) Note: To obtain the same results without the burden and the cost of developing films, replace the film
by a dosimeter and measure the dose instead of the optical density. Note that this variant works well
only if a neutral Film-screen correction (100% correction) is used with the ion chamber.
Table 69- Test Conditions for AEC Mode Constancy

Exp. Phantom Thickness Time
Tube kV Tube mA O. D.
No. (cm) (ms)
1 80 100 15
2 80 100 15
3 80 100 15
4 80 100 15
5 80 100 15
6 60 100 15
7 100 100 15
8 120 100 15
9 60 100 10
10 120 100 10
11 80 100 20
12 100 100 20
Initials: _____

Table 70- Dose Constancy at same Phantom Thickness and varying Tube kVs
Phantom Exp. O.D. Diff. O.D.
Tube kV O.D.
Thickness No. versus O.D. Avrg differs by:
80 15 1 ______ ______
60 15 6 ______ ______
100 15 7 ______ ______
120 15 8 ______ ______
Compliance ± 0,15
Optical Density Average = _____
Test Passed Test Failed
Table 71- Dose Constancy at same Phantom Thickness versus Adjacent Tube kVs
Phantom Exp. Adjacent Exp. O.D.
KV No.
O.D. No.
O.D.
Thickness kV differs by:
60 15 cm 6 _____ 80 1 _____ _____
80 15 cm 1 _____ 100 7 _____ _____
100 15 cm 7 _____ 120 8 _____ _____
Compliance ± 0.15
Table 72- Dose versus Constant kV and Different Phantom Thicknesses

Phantom Exp. Phantom Exp. O.D.
kV No.
O.D. No.
O.D.
Thickness -1- Thickness -2- differs by:
60 10 cm 9 _____ 15 cm 6 _____ _____
80 15 cm 1 _____ 20 cm 11 _____ _____
100 15 cm 7 _____ 20 cm 12 _____ _____
120 10 cm 10 _____ 15 cm 8 _____ _____
Compliance ± 0.20
Initials: _____

Table 73- Dose Constancy as a Function of Different kVs and Phantom Thicknesses
Phantom Exp. O.D. Diff. O.D.
Tube kV O.D.
Thickness No. versus O.D. Avrg differs by:
60 10 cm 9 ______ ______ ______
60 15 cm 6 ______ ______ ______
80 15 cm 1 ______ ______ ______
80 20 cm 11 ______ ______ ______
100 15 cm 7 ______ ______ ______
100 20 cm 12 ______ ______ ______
120 10 cm 10 ______ ______ ______
120 15 cm 8 ______ ______ ______
Compliance ± 0.20
Optical Density Average = _______
Table 74- Dose Constancy as a Function of Constant kV and Phantom Thickness

Phantom O.D. Diff. O.D.
Tube kV Exp. No. O.D.
Thickness versus O.D.Avrg differs by:
80 15 cm 1 ______ ______ ______
80 15 cm 2 ______ ______ ______
80 15 cm 3 ______ ______ ______
80 15 cm 4 ______ ______ ______
80 15 cm 5 ______ ______ ______
Compliance ± 0.10
Optical Density Average = _______
Initials: _____

6.6 AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL LIMIT

1. Set-up the following A.E.C. exposure: 65 kV and 200 mA. Set the backup
mAs to as close as possible to 600.
2. Block the phototiming detection by closing the collimator or by
introducing a lead shield into the X-ray beam.
3. Make an exposure and verify that the exposure mAs post-display on the OK ; NO
operator console and the reading of the mAs meter do not exceed 600
mAs.
6.7 FLUORO MODE

6.7.1 Fluoro Console
Do Fluoro and verify that:
1. The EXP yellow lamp lights during Fluoro and turns off when the Fluoro OK ; NO
footswitch is released.
2. The Fluoro Cumulated Timer functions. Make sure the timer stops when OK ; NO
the Fluoro footswitch is released. Verify the function of the [Timer Reset]
key.
3. The alarm pulses (pulsed alarm) for the first 5 minutes and then changes OK ; NO
for continuous tone after 5 minutes of Fluoroscopy.
4. The [Alarm Reset] key functions. OK ; NO
6.7.2 Fluoroscopic Entrance Exposure Rate

Verify the maximum Fluoroscopic Entrance Exposure Rate:
Dose Measurements
1. Use the procedure of Section 5.4.1 to measure the Fluoro surface dose at
125 kV, maximum pulse rate in Low level. ____ R/min ;
2. Repeat the procedure to measure the Fluoro surface dose at 125 kV, ____ R/min ;
maximum pulse rate in High level.
3. If Image Enhancement mode is used, perform Fluoro at every pulse rate
inferior to the maximum and verify that the dose measured does not
exceed the dose measured at maximum pulse rate
• For Low level Fluoro OK ; NO
OK ; NO
• For High level Fluoro
Initials: _____

7.0 TROUBLESHOOTING & SERVICING
IN THIS CHAPTER :
7.1 WARNING ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 EXPOSURE INHIBITION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.2.1 Exposure Limits ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Interlock Conditions.............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3 FAULT CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.1 Abnormal End of Exposure................................................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.2 Operator End of Exposure .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.3 Alarms...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.4 OPERATOR MESSAGES........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.4.1 Informative Messages ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-5
7.4.2 Inverter Problem Message / Power Reduction Mode...................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4.3 Messages and Meanings ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.5 DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.1 Power On Self-Test ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.5.2 Operator Console’s Service Mode..................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.2.1 Invoking the System Monitor in Console’s Service Mode..........................................................................................................7-14
7.5.2.2 Anode Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................................7-15
7.5.2.3 IGBT Code ........................................................................................................................................................................................7-15
Resetting the Generator/Basket Status ..............................................................................................................................................7-15
7.5.2.4 Software Revision .............................................................................................................................................................................7-18
7.5.2.5 History Log ........................................................................................................................................................................................7-18
7.5.2.6 Three-Phase Inverter Board Register.............................................................................................................................................7-19
I- Inverter Board Status Register Updating........................................................................................................................................7-19
II- Inverter Board Power On Self-Test ..............................................................................................................................................7-20
III- Inverter Board Test on PREP ......................................................................................................................................................7-20
7.5.2.7 Statistics ..............................................................................................................................................................................................7-21
7.5.2.8 User’s Monitor Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................7-22
7.5.3 Epsilon PC Tools’ Diagnostic Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 7-22
7.5.3.1 Monitor Module ................................................................................................................................................................................7-22
7.5.3.2 History Log ........................................................................................................................................................................................7-25
7.5.3.3 Tube Calibration Viewer ..................................................................................................................................................................7-27
7.5.3.4 Generator Calibration Module ........................................................................................................................................................7-28
7.5.4 Diagnostic Points ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-30
7.5.4.1 Controller Board P/N 9798.01 .......................................................................................................................................................7-30
Test Points: .............................................................................................................................................................................................7-31
Typical Waveforms: ...............................................................................................................................................................................7-32
LEDs on Controller board: ..................................................................................................................................................................7-33
Input Voltage Reference & Threshold – J9 Connector: ..................................................................................................................7-33
7.5.4.2 3-Phase Inverter Boards P/N 9736.01 ..........................................................................................................................................7-33
Generator Power On LED:..................................................................................................................................................................7-33
7.5.4.3 Optional Fluoro Boards ...................................................................................................................................................................7-34
7.5.4.4 Anode Starter Board.........................................................................................................................................................................7-35
7.5.4.5 Optional Cable Discharge Interface Board P/N 11206.000 ......................................................................................................7-36
7.6 REPLACEMENT OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE.................................................................................................................. 7-37
7.6.1 Three-Phase Inverter Board & EPS Starter Board Replacement ................................................................................................. 7-38
7.6.2 Generator Basket Replacement.......................................................................................................................................................... 7-42
7.6.2.1 Preliminary Step (Generator Configuration Data Backup).........................................................................................................7-42
7.6.2.2 Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................7-42
7.6.2.3 Firmware Upload and Final Verification.......................................................................................................................................7-48
7.6.3 Optional Boards Replacement ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.6.3.1 Fluoro Board Replacement..............................................................................................................................................................7-49
7.6.3.2 Anode Starter Board : Refer to Section 7.6.1................................................................................................................................7-49
7.6.3.3 Relay Board and Miscellaneous boards..........................................................................................................................................7-49
7.6.4 Fuse and Battery Replacement ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-50
7.6.4.1 Battery Function and Replacement ................................................................................................................................................7-50
7.6.4.2 Fuse Replacement .............................................................................................................................................................................7-51
Continued =>

7.6.5 Software Update................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-52

7.6.5.1 Firmware & Epsilon PC Tools .......................................................................................................................................................7-52
7.6.5.2 Options Chip P/N 11037.xxx.........................................................................................................................................................7-54
7.7 THEORY OF OPERATION.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.7.1 Functional Blocks................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-55
7.7.1.1 kV Output ..........................................................................................................................................................................................7-55
7.7.1.2 Power Supply .....................................................................................................................................................................................7-56
7.7.1.3 mA Control........................................................................................................................................................................................7-57
7.7.1.4 Filament Selection.............................................................................................................................................................................7-57
7.7.2 Description of AEC Modes................................................................................................................................................................ 7-58
7.7.2.1 User Configurable Backup Time AEC Mode...............................................................................................................................7-58
7.7.2.2 Hidden Backup Time AEC Mode..................................................................................................................................................7-58
7.7.2.3 Falling Load Mode............................................................................................................................................................................7-59
7.7.3 Generator Calibration and Configuration Data............................................................................................................................... 7-60
7.7.3.1 Summary of Data ..............................................................................................................................................................................7-60
7.7.3.2 Integrity of Data................................................................................................................................................................................7-60
7.7.4 Console Configuration & Communication ...................................................................................................................................... 7-62
7.7.4.1 PC & Generator Link Types ...........................................................................................................................................................7-62
7.7.4.2 Proprietary CANBUS Communication Protocol.........................................................................................................................7-63
7.8 CONFIDENCE TEST ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-63
Inside the EPS High-Voltage Generator

7. Troubleshooting & Servicing
7.1 WARNING
This equipment must be serviced by trained

personnel only, and using the utmost care.
Dangerous and lethal potentials are present in
offline circuits in several places of this unit!
High voltage, AC line-connected potentials are present in numerous circuits.

Even when the generator is switched off at the operator console, mains voltages are still present in
High-Voltage Power Supply unit. These voltages are extremely dangerous, use the utmost caution.
7.2 EXPOSURE INHIBITION
7.2.1 Exposure Limits

Exposure inhibit conditions occur when technique parameters exceed the limit of the X-ray tube or
of the generator. The “Limits LED” turns on for the duration of the condition, and a specific
message displays in the graphic screen. The message stays on until the technique factors are
sufficiently reduced by the operator and the limit condition lifted.
7.2.2 Interlock Conditions
Workstations have their own set of programmable interlocks to prevent unsafe exposure. An
interlock condition always results in the invalidation of the exposure process.
Interlock conditions are apparent by the lighting of
the interlock lamp and by the display of an interlock
message on the operator console (Figure 7.1).
Interlocks are determined as a function of which

exposure state the interlock is intended to control for
a given workstation. Four (4) generator states are
possible.
Make sure the programming of the interlock(s) was

done correctly as per Chapter 4.
Figure 7.1 –
Fault (left) and Interlock (right) conditions in RAD

7.3 FAULT CONDITIONS
7.3.1 Abnormal End of Exposure

Errors occur during exposure when an abnormal condition intervenes with the exposure process.
The generator will signal errors to the operator console in the following three manners:
1. Visually; by blinking the parameter’s decimal point until the fault is reset. See Table 75.
2. Audibly; by emitting 4 consecutive beeps one second after the exposure switch is released.
3. By displaying an appropriate message on the graphic screen. See Table 77.
To reset a fault, the operator either presses the [Fault Reset] key or re-activates the exposure
switch.
If backup mAs or backup time happens before normal phototiming detection, the generator
aborts the exposure immediately and displays the "END of EXP. : B.U.T." message in the graphic
display. In this condition, the generator can only be reset by pressing the [Fault Reset] key.
Table 75- End of Exposure Visual References

RAD Exposure Parameter Status Indicator
Backup parameter in Pre-Display Setup Blinking of parameter’s unit LED.
NO FAULT
Blinking of parameter’s decimal point.
Actual parameter value after exposure
EXPOSURE FAULT
1. [Fault Reset] key’s LED turns on.
Abnormal termination of exposure
Fault LED and post-display of parameters
2. Parameter’s decimal point blinks

until fault is reset.
7.3.2 Operator End of Exposure

If either Prep or X-rays switch is released before the normal exposure termination, the generator
aborts the exposure immediately and displays the "EXPOSURE ABORTED OPERATOR" message in
the graphic screen. The real mAs or time factors are updated and displayed in the parameter screens
(blinking of the decimal point means real exposure factors).

7.3.3 Alarms
Table 76- Audible Alarms

Alarms in Fluoro
Fluoro Alarm Tone

Pulsed tone: Low Fluoro=> 1 beep/2 seconds
“Fluoroscopy ON" alarm (1)
High Fluoro => 1 beep/1 second
“Fluoro 5-minute elapsed” alarm (2) Continuous tone
“System Fault” alarm 4 consecutive beeps
(1) This alarm is heard in the X-ray room only and requires the presence of an external buzzer.
(2) The alarm is shut off by pressing the Alarm Reset key at the Epsilon Operator Console.
Alarms in RAD
Exposure Alarm Tone
“RAD X-ray ON" alarm (3) Continuous tone
“80 % of maximum run length” alarm Pulsed tone (2 beeps per second)
Exposure Fault and B.U.T. alarms 4 consecutive beeps
(3) The tone lasts for the duration of the X-ray exposure (1/4 second minimum).
7.4 OPERATOR MESSAGES
To help understanding the nature and severity of a fault, refer first to Table 77 (Operator Messages).
Refer also to the diagnostic mode of the Epsilon PC Tools, Section 7.5.3.
7.4.1 Informative Messages

Messages are displayed in the operator console to signal an event or a condition to the operator (see
Section 7.4.3). Most of the time, the message is only informative and does not prevent the operator
from doing X-rays. Such informative messages disappear from the display whenever the operator
presses any key on the console. When there is no message to be displayed to the operator, the
message zone is replaced by the tube heat unit value expressed in percent of total tube capacity
utilization.

7.4.2 Inverter Problem Message / Power Reduction Mode

When the status of a 3-Phase Inverter board changes, an Inverter Problem message displays on the
console, as shown below in Figure 7.2 (left) for Inverter board in slot N° 6.
When this condition occurs, usually at power on, the generator is completely disabled and the only
possible action available to the operator is the acknowledgement of the inverter fault by doing a
power off/on cycle. The acknowledgment of an inverter problem by cycling the power is a
palliative means only: the generator is available for x-rays but it will probably operate at reduced
power output capacity. In that mode, the message “Power Reduced” displays (Figure 7.2, right) and
will continue to be displayed each time the generator is cycled off/on again. To get rid of this
problem and restore the generator full power, a service intervention is necessary (see § 7.5.2.6).
Inverter Problem
Inverter N°6 Problem The generator is enabled,

The generator is disabled; with power reduced.
Do a power off/on cycle to

acknowledge the Inverter fault.
Figure 7.2 – Inverter N°6 Problem (left) followed by a “Power Reduced” message (right).
Refer to Section 7.5.2.6 for more information.

7.4.3 Messages and Meanings
Table 77- Messages to Operator (1/6)

ACC. DOSE EXCEEDED < DAP option Message >
The accumulated dose for the current patient is exceeded. Release the exposure switch and stop the exam.
AEC/ABS DEVICE OPEN < No Exposure Allowed >
Fluoro or AEC exposure not allowed as electronic sensor is not responding or cable is open.
ANODE DRIVE FAILURE < No Exposure Allowed >
Stator Drive Fault. Refer to Section 7.8.4.2.
BU mAs LIMIT < No Exposure Allowed >
Back up mAs> maximum mAs of generator. Reduce the exposure factors.
BACKUP TIME LIMIT < No Exposure Allowed >
In AEC serial exposure mode, the selected backup time is too high. Decrease the backup time factor until
the message is lifted.
CABLE_DIS. FAILURE EOX-OFF < Cable Discharge Option Message >
The cable discharge function is shut off because of an internal fault. Fluoro will be performed in Dose
Reduction mode only, and the maximum pulse rate is halved.
CABLE_DIS. OPEN CABLE < Cable Discharge Option Message>
All exposure switches are disabled; the generator cannot make exposure: Verify the patch cables are correctly
connected between the cable discharge unit and the cable discharge interface board.
CABLE_DIS. OVERHEAT < Cable Discharge Option Message >
The temperature inside the cable discharge unit reaches 80°C and the cable discharge function is shut off.
Fluoro will be performed in Dose Reduction mode, and the maximum pulse rate is halved. Until the cable
discharge unit internal temperature is below 70°C, the pulse rate cannot be increased manually up to the
maximum value, and the Image Enhancement mode is disabled.
CHECK OPTION CONFIG. < Fault Message >
The generator configuration is not OK. Open the generator configuration file in Epsilon PC Tools and do
View/Options. Verify that the “Expansion boards” description matches the boards connected on the
different slots on the Expansion Motherboard.
CLIENT DEFAULT LOADED < Informative Message >
Epsilon PC Program successfully uploaded the Client IO firmware from the computer to the generator.
COMM. FAILURE < Fault Message >
Communication error between the generator and the configuration device (generally, the PC connected to
the operator console). Do a generator power off/on cycle. Close and restart PC Tools program. If the
message error persists, go to the history log, take note of the error code for that fault and direct it to Emd.
CONFIG. DATA CORRUPTED < Fault Message >
Checksum error; the generator is unusable. Use the Epsilon PC Tools program and your backup data to re-
configure the generator. Refer to section 8.2.3.5 (see also section7.7.3.).
CONSOLE DEFAULT LOADED < Fault Message >
The console firmware has just been uploaded into the generator. Make sure that you transferred all of your
APR exam backup data using Epsilon PC Tools program (Section 4.7).
CONTROLLER BOARD FAILURE < No Exposure Allowed >
Error on the Controller board. Contact the service representative.
DAP ERROR < DAP option Message >
The stability of the DAP device is not adequate. Verify the DAP chamber.


DAP LOCKED < DAP option Message >
Wrong internal pin code. Check and/or reset the DAP device.
DEFECTIVE STANDBY DRIVER < Informative Message >
The standby filament circuit is erratic and is disabled. The generator can still be used to expose, but the
exposure preparation might be longer. It is recommended to perform a tube calibration.
DOSE RATE EXCEEDED < DAP option Message >
The instantaneous dose for the current patient is exceeded. Release the exposure switch. Reduce the factors
before resuming the exam.
EXAM SAVED < Informative Message >
The original exam setup was modified from the APR and was saved by the operator.
EXPOSURE ABORTED “XX” < Fault Message >
XX = “Anode Arc”, “Cath Arc”, “Tube Arc” or “kV Fault”
kV drop has been detected on the anode (or cathode or tube) side and the generator has stopped the
exposure. Press the [Fault Reset] key. When this condition occurs in Fluoro, the operator restores the
Fluoro by releasing and re-actuating the Fluoro pedal.
EXPOSURE ABORTED ___ (Interlock Name) < Fault Message >
The exposure terminated abnormally because of an interlock fault. Check the interlock condition and repeat
the exposure.
EXPOSURE ABORTED B.U. mAs < Fault Message >
The AEC exposure terminated abnormally; the AEC device has not been able to detect the desired voltage
threshold. Press the [Fault Reset] key at the console to reset the message and try to repeat the exposure.
Check the AEC device circuit.
EXPOSURE ABORTED B.U. TIME < Fault Message >
The AEC exposure terminated abnormally; the AEC device has not been able to detect the desired voltage
threshold. Press the [Fault Reset] key at the console to reset the generator and try to repeat the exposure.
Check the AEC device circuit.
EXPOSURE ABORTED C.D._FAULT < Cable Discharge Option Message >
The exposure terminated abnormally. Press the [Fault Reset] key at the console to reset the generator and
repeat the exposure. If the fault persists, contact your service personnel.
EXPOSURE ABORTED mAs < Fault Message >
mAs in 3-pts mode: Check the Tube calibration.
EXPOSURE ABORTED NO SIGNAL < Fault Message >
The exposure stopped at about 20% of exposure completion as insufficient brightness feedback was
received at the AEC sensor. Check the AEC sensor, the X-ray beam alignment or the APR exam.
EXPOSURE ABORTED OPERATOR < Fault Message >
The exposure terminated abnormally as the operator released the exposure switch before the end of the
exposure. The film exposure might be underexposed. Press the [Fault Reset] key at the console to reset
the generator. If necessary, repeat the film exposure.
EXPOSURE ABORTED TIME < Fault Message >
Time in 2-point Mode: Check the Tube calibration.
EXPOSURE INHIBITED ___ (Interlock name) < Informative Message >
The exposure did not start because of an interlock condition. Verify the interlock condition.
EXPOSURE TIME LIMIT < No Exposure Allowed >
The exposure time of the current serial technique exceeds the time limit. Reduce the irradiation time, the
exposure rate or the mA/mAs factor.


FLUORO DOSE CHANGED < History Log Message >
In the History Log of Epsilon PC Tools (Service Module), this message indicates that the Maximum Fluoro
Entrance Rate has been modified by the user. This is done using the operator console in service mode or by
sending new data (Fluoro mA/mAs) to the generator by right-clicking on the Epsilon PC tools (Generator
Calibration module), depending on the generator configuration.
FLUORO DOSE REDUCED < Cable Discharge Option Message >
The cable discharge function is shut off by the generator. Fluoro is performed in Dose Reduction mode and
the maximum pulse rate is halved. Until the operative condition returns to normal, the Image Enhancement
mode is disabled and Fluoro cannot be done at maximum pulse rate.
FLUORO SAVED < Informative Message >
The Fluoro setup was modified and saved by the operator using the Exam/Fluoro saving key.
FLUORO SHUTDOWN < Informative Message >
Fluoro footswitch has been active uninterruptedly for 10 minutes. Release the Fluoro switch to lift this
condition.
FRAME RATE RUN LENGTH LIMIT < No Exposure Allowed >
The current APR exam uses a frame rate and/or a run length not supported by the workstation
configuration. Select a valid parameter to continue and save the new exam to correct this condition.
GENERATOR CONTROLLER FAILURE < No Exposure Allowed >
Do a generator power off/on cycle. Close and restart PC Tools program. If the message error persists, go to
the history log, take note of the error code for that fault and direct it to Emd.
GENERATOR COOLING DELAY < No Exposure Allowed >
The generator was probably used intensively in the recent minutes. Decrease the exposure parameters or
wait a few moments until the temperature of the generator returns to normal. If this condition repeats
frequently, verify that the Epsilon High-Voltage Power Supply is installed in a well-ventilated environment.
GENERATOR KW LIMIT < No Exposure Allowed >
The technique parameters exceed the maximum kW or power range of the generator. Reduce the exposure
factors. For a recurrent message:
° Perform the 3-Phase Inverter board self-test (Section 7.5.2.6), and/or;
° Verify the Line Impedance Factor (Section 7.5.3.4), and/or;
° Verify the Power Quality Factor (Section 7.5.3.2).
GENERATOR KV LIMIT < No Exposure Allowed >
The selected kV exceeds the maximum kV range of the generator. Reduce the tube loading kV parameter.
GENERATOR mA LIMIT < No Exposure Allowed >
The selected mA exceeds the maximum mA range of the generator. Reduce the tube loading mA parameter.
GENERATOR MAS LIMIT < No Exposure Allowed >
The irradiation time by tube mA product exceeds the mAs range of the generator. Decrease (or increase) the
mA or exposure time until the mAs factor falls within the range of the generator.
HOLD KEY TO MONITOR < Informative Message >
The [Fault Reset] key is depressed. Hold the key until the Monitor mode displays in the
graphic screen. Refer to Section 7.5.2.8.
HOLD KEY TO RESET < Informative Message >
On RF generators only. Hold the [Timer Reset] key depressed until the Fluoro timer resets.


HOLD KEY TO SAVE RAD/FLUORO < Informative Message >
The current RAD or Fluoro exam setup has been modified by the operator and the "Save
Exam/Fluoro" hidden key (right column’s third key) is pressed. Keep the key depressed
to save the exam, or released it to continue.
=> Saving an exam or Fluoro results in the replacement of the original exam
or Fluoro parameters by the current parameters. <=
H.U. LIMIT / H. U = _ _ % / WAIT_ _ % < No Exposure Allowed >
(1) The technique selected would boost the X-ray tube heat units over 100%; or (2) the anode heat unit load
exceeds 100% of the maximum anode heat storage capacity.
In both cases, the exposure is prevented. Wait a few moments to cool down the X-ray tube anode, or if
possible, reduce the tube loading factors.
INTERNAL FAILURE < No Exposure Allowed >
Do a generator power off/on cycle. Close and restart PC Tools program. If the message error persists, go to
the history log, take note of the error code for that fault and direct it to Emd.
INVALID ANODE SPEED < No Exposure Allowed >
The current APR exam uses an anode speed not supported by the workstation configuration. As the anode
speed cannot be selected from the operator console, use the Epsilon PC Program to setup the anode speed
appropriately for the concerned exam.
INVALID FOCUS < No Exposure Allowed >
The current APR exam uses a focal spot not supported by the workstation configuration. Select a valid focal
spot to continue and save the new exam to correct this condition.
INVALID FRAME RATE < No Exposure Allowed >
The current APR exam contains frame rate selections not supported by the workstation configuration. Select
a valid frame rate to continue and save the new exam to correct this condition.
INVALID ION SELECTION < No Exposure Allowed >
This fault results from an invalid APR exam. Select a valid ion chamber setup to continue and save the new
exam to correct this condition. The ion chamber setup is related to the workstation configuration; it is
possible that the actual workstation does not support the ion chamber setup of the currently selected APR
exam. Use the Epsilon PC Program to correct this situation, if necessary.
INVERTER PROBLEM “_, ….” < No Exposure Allowed >
The power-on self test detected a fault on one or more 3-Phase Inverter board (s). For example, the message
“Inverter Problem 3, 5” would indicate that something is wrong with 3-Phase Inverter boards in position 3
and in position 5. Potential problems are of two kinds: (i) a fuse on the board or (2) the Inverter board itself.
In either case, the Inverter board status register needs to be updated. Refer to Sections 7.4.2 & 7.5.2.6 for
detail.
Whenever necessary, install a Dummy board P/N 9932.00 in replacement of any missing or unused 3-Phase
Inverter board. If no Dummy board is available, remove the fuse of a spare Inverter board and install the
board in the empty slot to simulate the board presence.
• For EPS 45-80 configuration, the number of 3-Phase Inverter boards varies from 3 to 6.
In this configuration, no empty slots should be allowed in the 3-Phase Inverter board
locations. Any missing board should be replaced by a "Dummy Inverter Jumper
Board", P/N 9930.00.
• For the EPS 30R/30RF configuration, only two 3-Phase Inverter boards are present on the
generator (no other boards in positions 3 thru 6).
LARGE FIL. CALIB. REQUIRED < Informative Message >
Emission calibration of selected filament is corrupted. Perform a tube calibration.


LARGE FILAMENT OPEN < Informative Message >
Open large filament condition is detected. Verify the X-ray tube. X-rays can be done on the small focal spot.
OPEN CABLE FAILURE < Fault Message >
Internal cables fault; There is an open path or a wrong connection in the Cathode or Anode High-Voltage
modules link with the Controller board. No exposure is allowed; Check the following connections:
1. J17 on the back of Controller PCB to Cathode H.V. module J2 connector;
2. J19 on the back of Controller PCB to Cathode H.V. module J1 connector;
3. J18 on the back of Controller PCB to Anode H.V. module J2 connector.
OPEN FILAMENT COMMON Cathode H-V Module
Cathode H. V. Cable
No exposure is allowed; X-Ray Tube
Check the common filament circuitry:
UUUU
UUU
1. Cathode H.V. Cable; Small Fil.
2. Connectors; Common Fil.
3. X-ray Tube;
UUUU
UUU
Large Fil.
4. Cathode H.V. Module.
OPTIONS CHANGED < No Exposure Allowed >

Using the Epsilon PC Tools, open the Options page and verify the hardware & software options. Make sure
that good boards are configured in the Expansion Configuration.
POWER REDUCED < Informative Message >
An Inverter problem has been latched by the generator and the operator has acknowledged it by doing a
power off/on cycle. The generator will operate at power reduced. It is recommended to verify the inverter
boards functionality. Refer to Sections 7.4.2 & 7.5.2.6 for detail.
POWER SUPPLY FAILURE < Fault Message >
Major fault condition: no exposure is allowed. Refer to your service representative.
RAD MODE DISABLED < Informative Message >
Exposure is not allowed as the selected exam or exposure mode has been disabled for this workstation or
APR node. Choose another APR exam or exposure mode.
RELEASE EXPOSURE SWITCH < Informative Message >
An exposure has just terminated. Release the PREP and RAD switches.
REPLACE BATTERY < Informative Message >
It is recommended to replace the RAM backup memory battery on the Controller board.
Refer to Section 7.6.4.1.
SHUTTING DOWN < Informative Message >
The power off key was pressed on the console and the generator is doing the shutting down procedure.
SMALL FIL. CALIB. REQUIRED < Informative Message >
Emission calibration of selected filament is corrupted. Perform a tube calibration.
SMALL FILAMENT OPEN < Informative Message >
Open small filament condition is detected. Verify the X-ray tube. If necessary, use the large filament.
TEMP. SENSOR FAILURE < Fault Message >
No exposure allowed. Verify the temperature sensor connection in the generator basket.


TRACK COOLING DELAY < Informative Message >
The operator presses the PREP and RAD switches immediately at the end of an exposure. Wait at least five
seconds (minimum track cooling delay) at the end of an exposure before initiating another PREP and RAD
sequence.
TUBE CURRENT FAILURE < Informative Message >
The tube current is out of tolerance. Perform a tube calibration. If the problem persists, ask the service
representative.
TUBE FIL. LIMIT < Informative Message >
Exposure parameters exceed the maximum operating range of the X-R filament. Increase the kV, reduce the
mA or switch to the large focal spot.
TUBE HOUSING OVERHEAT < Informative Message >
The tube housing overheats and the exposure is not allowed. Release the prep and exposure switch and wait
until the message disappears; this will provide sufficient cooling time to the tube housing.
TUBE KV LIMIT < Informative Message >
The kV for the selected exam is beyond the kV range of the X-R tube. Reduce the kV factor.
TUBE KW LIMIT < Informative Message >
Exposure parameters for the selected exam are beyond the operating kW range of the X-ray tube (or
filament). Switch to the large focal spot or reduce any exposure factor.
TUBE SWITCH FAILURE < Informative Message >
The stator current monitoring is out of tolerance and the exposure preparation aborts. Try to repeat the
exposure. If the message persists, refer to the Rotor Controller Manual.
TUBE SWITCH MISSING < Informative Message >
No tube switch has been detected. Use the Epsilon PC Tools to verify if the current workstation and/or
tube number is correct in the generator configuration.
USER SUPPLY FAILURE < Fault Message >
No exposure is allowed. The connected equipment draws too much current from the generator. Verify the
external equipment interfaced with the generator.
VERIFY DAP CHAMBER < DAP option Message >
Verify the interconnection of the DAP device to the generator.
W.S. DISABLED < Informative Message >
The selected workstation is not enabled in the generator setup. Select another workstation to continue or, if
necessary, enable the workstation using the Epsilon PC Program.
W.S. FLUORO DISABLED < Informative Message >
The selected workstation does not support Fluoro. Select another workstation to continue or, if necessary,
enable the Fluoro in the current workstation using the Epsilon PC Program.
X-RAY DISABLED < Informative Message >
On certain operator consoles, PREP, RAD, and Fluoro switches can be disabled. Toggle this mode (enabled
the exposure mechanism) by pressing the X-Ray Disable key on the operator console.
X-RAY DEFAULT LOADED < Informative Message >
Epsilon PC Program successfully uploaded the X-ray firmware from the computer to the generator.

7.5 DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES

To help investigate the possible causes of failure or malfunctioning of the generator, different
diagnostic means are available to the service representative and to the operator. The most basic
instance of diagnostic is done each time the generator is turned on. Indeed, every generator power-
on process triggers the execution of a self test that will validate the basic functions of the generator
(Section 7.5.1).
A more comprehensive diagnostic can be obtained by using either the Epsilon operator console
service mode (Section 7.5.2) or the Epsilon PC tools’ Service tools (Section 7.5.3). These
diagnostic means allow monitoring certain generator states, I/Os activation, changing the status of
the 3-Phase Inverter boards, looking some statistics and parameters and testing specific functions
(Sections 7.5.1 thru 7.5.3).
Finally, different diagnostic points can be found on the Controller board and elsewhere. Refer to
Section 7.5.4.
7.5.1 Power On Self-Test

The generator goes through a self-test routine every time it is turned on or the service mode is
exited.
1. Verify that no fault is detected on the console during a power-on initialization process.
2. At the end of the self-test, the console ends up into normal display mode with the default
workstation and tube loading factors. Verify that no message displays on the console.
− If a message is reported, make sure it does not refer to a generator fault. The generator
will be able to expose if the Fault and Limit lamps are off.
− If a fault is latched and the generator cannot be reset to normal operation, refer to the
Operator Message Table 77 or enter the Monitor Mode (Sections 7.5.2 & 7.5.3).
7.5.2 Operator Console’s Service Mode

The operator console Service mode includes the following modules:
1. X-ray Tube Calibration module, for maintenance (Section 5.2);
2. Fluoro Calibration, for maintenance (Sections 5.4 & 5.5);
3. Setup Tools, for maintenance and troubleshooting;
o Console Setup; Contrast, brightness and volume (Section 4.8)
o System Setup:
Anode Rotor Brake & Start Module (Section 7.5.2.2)
System Monitor:
− Software Version Viewer (Section 7.5.2.4)
− History Log (Section 7.5.2.5)
− Hardware Register (Sections 7.5.2.3 & 7.5.2.6)
− System Statistics (Section 7.5.2.7)

7.5.2.1 Invoking the System Monitor in Console’s Service Mode
Hold WK1 key

and turn on power
to enter Service Mode
Service Mode: The service mode is invoked by turning on the

operator console at the same time than holding down WS1 key.
Release only WS1 key when the service mode displays on the
graphic screen.
Figure 7.3 – Epsilon Console in Service Mode.
In service mode, invoke the monitor mode by pressing System and Monitor keys (Figure 7.4). The
different options are discussed in the following sections.
B B
C
A
E
___________________________ Monitor Mode ___________________________

A) Anode: Section 7.5.2.2 D) Hardware: Sections 7.5.2.3 & 7.5.2.6
B) IGBT code: Section 7.5.2.3 E) History: Section 7.5.2.5
C) Software Revision: Section 7.5.2.4 F) Statistics Section 7.5.2.7
Figure 7.4 – Monitor Mode in Epsilon Console Service Mode.

7.5.2.2 Anode Monitoring

1. Put the console in Service mode (Section 7.5.2.1).
2. Select "System" and "Anode” to call upon the Anode monitoring screen
3. Use Figure 7.5 to validate the anode monitoring functions..
Press the LOW key to boost the Press the HIGH key to boost
anode to low speed. the anode to high speed.
Press the Brake key to apply a DC
brake on the anode.
Figure 7.5 – Anode Monitoring Screen.
7.5.2.3 IGBT Code
The IGBT code displayed on top of many service mode screens can be used to have a IGBT
picture of the status of different parts of the generator and X-ray tube path. 6 0 0 0
• I: 3-Phase Inverter board code (Inverters & Dummy Inverters). This code gives a quick
indication of the Inverter board status (Table 78). The Inverter board’s status shall be
manually updated, for example after replacement of an Inverter board.
NOTE: A more complete picture of the 3-Phase Inverter board functionality is
available in a different register, as described in Section 7.5.2.6. This hardware register
will give you the exact status of every board installed in the six Inverter board slots.
• G: The generator status includes the rotor controller, tube switch, console and internal
cables; see Table 79-a. This status can be reset in the Hardware register module,
described below.
• B: The electronic controls status (referred to as the basket) includes the Power Supply,
Controller board and Expansion boards; see Table 79-b. This status can be reset in the
Hardware register module, described below.
• T: The X-ray tube status (open filament(s)); see Table 80.
Resetting the Generator/Basket Status

To update the generator or the basket register (IGBT status), put the console in service mode
(Section 7.5.2.1) and select System Setup, Monitor, Hardware and Generator (or Basket).
A reset screen will display as shown in Figure 7.6. Press Yes selection key to clear the G (or B)
register to zero.

Figure 7.6 – Register screen in Service mode

In service mode, select System Setup/Monitor (Figure 7.4),
Hardware and Generator (or Basket).
Table 78- 3-Phase Inverter Board Possible Conditions as per [IGBT] code
Code Description Status
0 No good Inverter boards in the generator FAULT
1 One good Inverter board in the generator
2 2 good Inverter boards in the generator
3 3 good Inverter boards plus 3 Dummy boards in the generator NICE
4 4 good Inverter boards plus 2 Dummy boards in the generator
5 5 good Inverter boards plus one Dummy board in the generator
7 3 good Inverter boards in the generator SAD
One or more Inverter board(s) with a blown fuse
Number of Dummy board(s) in the generator between 0 and 2
One or more Inverter board(s) with a blown fuse
Number of Dummy board(s) in the generator between 0 and 2
9 Five good Inverter boards plus one Inverter board with a blown fuse
A 3 good Inverter boards plus between 1 and 3 Inverter(s) in bad condition CHECK
Between 0 and 2 Inverter board(s) with a blown fuse
Between 0 and 2 Dummy board(s)
B 4 good Inverter boards ; One or more Inverter board(s) in bad condition
0 or one Inverter board(s) with a blown fuse
0 or one Dummy board(s)
C 5 good Inverter boards plus one Inverter board in bad condition
D 3 good Inverter boards plus at least one Inverter board in uncertain condition FAULT
E 4 good Inverter boards plus at least one Inverter board in uncertain condition
F 5 good Inverter boards with one Inverter board in uncertain condition

Table 79-a Table 79-b
Generator Possible Status as per [IGBT] code Basket Possible Status as per [IGBT] code
Code Description Code Description
0 All functional 0 All functional
1 Stator drive connection error 1 Battery weak
2 Internal cable connection error 2 Power Supply filament trouble
3 Conditions 1 + 2 3 Conditions 1 + 2
4 Tube switch connection problem 4 Expansion board trouble(s)
7 Conditions 1 + 2 + 4 7 Conditions 1 + 2 + 4
8 Console H/W problem 8 User Power Supply problem
9 Rotor Controller H/W Fault 9 Controller Board unusable
A Options incompatibility A Power Supply Board unusable
B Conditions 9 + A B Conditions 9 + A
C Tube Switch or Cable Discharge problem C Expansion Board(s) unusable
D Conditions 9 + C D Conditions 9 + C
E Conditions A + C E Conditions A + C
F Conditions 9 + A + C F Conditions 9 + A + C
Table 80- Tube Possible Conditions as per [IGBT] code

Tube 2 Tube 1 Tube 2 Tube 1
Code Code
Large Small Large Small Large Small Large Small
0 0 0 0 0 8 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1 9 1 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0 A 1 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1 B 1 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0 C 1 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1 D 1 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0 E 1 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1 F 1 1 1 1
0 = Filament OK 1 = Filament open

7.5.2.4 Software Revision

Use the Operator Console Service Mode to view the revision number of the installed software.
1. Put the console in Service mode (Section 7.5.2.1).
2. Select "System", "Monitor" and “Soft Rev” (Figure 7.7).
3. Use the Arrow-up and Arrow-down keys to scroll between the different software modules:
Press the key to display Press the key to display the

the next page. previous page.
Press Main key to return to main Press Exit key to quit the service
service screen. mode.
p. 1/6 CIO Client I/O Software;

p. 2/6 XRAY X-ray Software;
p. 3/6 CON Console Software;
p. 4/6 CIO2 Client I/O Software (Biplane only);
p. 5/6 XRAY2 X-ray Software (Biplane only);
p. 6/6 CON2 Console Software (N/U).
Figure 7.7 – Software Version Viewer.
7.5.2.5 History Log

Significant events occurring during the operation of the generator are tracked and logged in FLASH
memory. A history register is maintained and forms a history log that can be visualized in service
mode and reset in PC tools (Section 7.5.3.2). Figure 7.8 below shows that events are encoded using a
2 byte-string (B0), are accompanied of a message (Table Fault) and the IGBT status (62A1) at the
time the event was logged (August 17, 2005 at 15:50:20 O’clock). The different pages of the history
log can be scrolled using the Page Up ( ) & Page Down ( ) keys.
Refer to Section 7.5.2.3 for detail

on IGBT code.
Press the key to display the
next page.
Press the key to display the
previous page.
Press Main key to return to main Press Exit key to quit the service
service screen. mode.
Figure 7.8 – Event History Viewer.

7.5.2.6 Three-Phase Inverter Board Register

The 3-Phase Inverter board status is kept into E2 memory and displayed in the service mode’s
Hardware register (Figure 7.9). The register is updated by the generator at power up (Table 81) or
when Prep switch is pressed (Table 82), or by the service representative himself when an
intervention is done on any Inverter or Inverter Dummy board.
• OK : The slot contains a 3-Phase Inverter board in good operational working condition.
• DUMMY : The slot contains a Dummy board in good operational working condition.
• FUSE : The slot contains an Inverter board with a blown fuse. It is possible that the board is
not used by the generator and therefore the total power could be reduced. See “Power
Reduced” message, in Section 7.4.2.
• BAD : The slot contains a damaged 3-Phase Inverter board that should be replaced for
optimum power operation of the generator.
• STOP : This status is attributed by the generator only. The normal operation won’t be allowed
as the slot contains a conflicting status. An “Inverter Problem” message is displayed on
the console at power up. The status must be corrected by the service representative.
Figure 7.9 – In Service Mode, select System Setup, Monitor (Figure 7.4), Hardware and Inverters
to invoke the Inverters register screen. The status of the 3-Phase inverter boards can be changed
using the selection keys 1 thru 6 corresponding to the Inverter board positions in the generator.
To replace a 3-Phase Inverter board or change a blown fuse, refer to the board
or fuse replacement procedure given in Section 7.6.1 or 7.6.4.2 respectively. Do
not try to replace a board or a fuse without reading and understanding that procedure.
I- Inverter Board Status Register Updating

To update the 3-Phase Inverter Board register, the technician indicates which inverter slots have
been filled with inverter boards and/or dummy boards, etc. The EEPROM status for each of the
slots indicated by the technician is updated to the correct value when the Save key is pressed.
Whenever the Inverter boards status is modified using the Save key, the generator does a re-
initialization process to validate the information.
Hint: The Inverter Board Status Register can also be reset using Epsilon PC Tools (Section 7.5.3.1).

II- Inverter Board Power On Self-Test

At every power on, the generator performs a self test to verify the status of the 3-Phase inverter
slots. The generator will NEVER change a status for a better one, for example changing "Stop" for
"OK". Only the service representative can update the Inverter status register (for example, after
replacement). But the generator will change the register status for a worse state at any moment that
condition occurs. The possible results coming out of the self-test is shown in Table 81 below.
Table 81- Possible actions done by the generator after every Inverter Power-On Test
Power On Compared against EEPROM Status
Test Result
STOP DUMMY FUSE BAD OK
STOP 1. No change 1. Write STOP 1. Write STOP 1. Write STOP 1. Write STOP
2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Stop
Dummy 1. No change 1. No change 1. Write STOP 1. Write STOP 1. Write STOP
2. Stop 2. Continue 2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Stop
IfR 1. No change 1. Write STOP 1. No change 1. No change 1. Write FUSE
2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Continue 2. Continue 2. Stop
IFr 1. No change 1. Write STOP 1. Write BAD 1. No change 1. Write BAD
2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Continue 2. Stop
IFR 1. No change 1. Write STOP 1. Write BAD 1. No change 1. No change
2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Continue 2. Continue
Legend:
Dummy : A Dummy board is installed
I fuse rail : 3-Phase Inverter board installed, bad fuse (f), bad rail (r) supply
I fuse Rail : 3-Phase Inverter board installed, bad fuse (f), good rail (R) supply
I Fuse rail : 3-Phase Inverter board installed, good fuse (F), bad rail (r) supply
I Fuse Rail : 3-Phase Inverter board installed, good fuse (F), good rail (R) supply
Continue : Do not display Operator message and go to normal mode
No change : Do not change the EEPROM current status
Stop : Disable all exposure switches and display "Inverter Problem # _" message.
Write BAD /FUSE / STOP : Change the EEPROM current status for BAD / FUSE or STOP
III- Inverter Board Test on PREP

During PREP, the 3-Phase Inverters are tested and each one receives either "BAD" or "GOOD"
status condition. This status is used to update, if need be, the Inverter register as shown in Table 82.
Table 82- Possible actions done after Inverters PREP Test

Operational Compared against EEPROM Status
Test Result
STOP DUMMY FUSE BAD OK
BAD 1. No change 1. No change 1. Write BAD 1. No change 1. Write BAD
2. Stop 2. Continue 2. Stop 2. Continue 2. Stop
GOOD 1. No change 1. Write STOP 1. No change 1. No change 1. No change
2. Stop 2. Stop 2. Continue 2. Continue 2. Continue

7.5.2.7 Statistics
The generator keeps statistics of the number of exposures, tube arcs occurrence, Inverters
temperature and certain operational limits. The data is stored in a FLASH memory that can be
visualized in service mode (Figure 7.10) and reset in PC tools. Use the Page Up ( ) & Page Down
( ) keys to display the different pages of this statistics module.
Figure 7.10 – Statistics Viewer.
Statistics Legend:
• SML : The number of exposure done on the small focal spot.
• LRG : The number of exposure done on the large focal spot.
• AG : Number of Anode-to-Ground arcs.
• AK : Number of Anode-to-Cathode arcs.
• KG : Number of Cathode-to-Ground arcs.
• > 100% : Number of occurrences of Tube Heat Units greater than a hundred percent.
• MAXHU : Number of times an exposure was not allowed because it would otherwise have
exceeded the Maximum Tube Heat Units.
• HSING : Number of occurrences of Tube Housing Inhibit conditions.
• OV KV : Number of occurrences of Over KV fault.
• 1: 24 : Maximum Temperature on 3-Phase Inverter in slot position 1 was 24°C. Idem
for positions 2 thru 6.
Statistics Reset: Statistics can only be reset by using Epsilon PC Tools. See Section 7.5.3.2.

7.5.2.8 User’s Monitor Mode

Certain service mode screens can be displayed in normal operative mode by the operator. This is
done by depressing the Fault Reset key on the console until the Monitor Mode displays on the
graphic screen (Figure 7.11). The different options are similar, except that the IGBT registers cannot
be reset and that the console language can be directly toggled between English and second language.
ii. Language selection. Press the upper left selection key to choose English console language
or the upper right selection key to select the second language. The default second language
is French but can be translated by the client. Refer to Section 4.8.2 for details.
iii. Software Revision option. Refer to Section 7.5.2.4 for details.
iv. History option. Refer to Section 7.5.2.5 for details.
v. Inverters option. In this mode, the status of the 3-Phase Inverter boards is given to the
operator but it cannot be modified. The Inverters registry can be updated in Service mode
only. Refer to Section 7.5.2.6 for details.
vi. Statistics option. Refer to Section 7.5.2.7 for details.
Depress and hold Fault

Reset key to invoke the
Monitor mode.
Figure 7.11 – Operator Console in User’s Monitor Mode.
7.5.3 Epsilon PC Tools’ Diagnostic Mode
7.5.3.1 Monitor Module

Use this module to query the status of the generator activity, to check the 3-Phase Inverter board
functionality or to obtain certain operative environment parameters or tube information.
To do so:
1. Connect the PC to the generator and launch the Epsilon PC Tools program.
2. Start the communication between the console and the generator using
Transfer and Connect.
3. Use Tools and Service menu to enable the Diagnostic module.
4. Choose the Monitor tab (Figure 7.12). The following information is displayed as a function of
the generator configuration.

Figure 7.12 – Epsilon PC Tools Monitor Mode
Data Monitored
o Devices zone: The cursor indicates the activity of the following µprocessors
or software module:
CIO = Client µprocessor, on the Controller board
X-RAY = X-ray µprocessor, on the Controller board
CON = Console µprocessor, on the Console board
CIO-P2 and XRAY-P2 are used for biplane system only
CON2 is not used
o State zone: The selected radio button indicates in which state the generator is in now:
Init = Initialization of the generator;
Idle = The generator is in wait mode;
Fault = The generator is in fault mode;
Prep = The prep switch is active;
Ready = The prep and RAD switch are active and the generator is in ready state,
waiting for a trigger to make an exposure.
Run = An exposure is in progress (this could be Fluoro if Fluoro checkbox is set).
o In the Filament current zone, the main and standby filament currents are given in
Amperes. The currently selected main filament is indicated on the operator console (focal
spot lamp).
o In the optional Cable Discharge Temp zone, the temperature at the cathode & anode
cable discharge

o Inverters zone: Gives the status of the 3-Phase Inverter Boards. See also Section 7.5.2.6.
1. First column (Board)
3-Phase Inverter board number, from position 1 thru position 6, as installed on the
Motherboard.
2. Second column (Status)
Indicates the status of the Inverter board installed at the given position (Table 83).
3. Third column (Sel.)
Indicates which Inverter boards are presently selected for the given generator's state
shown in the State zone. Not all boards are used at all times.
4. Fourth column (Temp.)
Indicates the estimated temperature at the surface of every Inverter boards (34°C in Figure
7.12). The ambient temperature is also given (22°C at the sensor location).
Fix button: Use this button to reset the Inverter Status Register, for instance when an
Inverter board is replaced. The generator does a re-initialization process to validate the
reset.
Table 83- Possible 3-Phase Inverter Status in EEPROM Register

Status Meaning (for the given Inverter Slot position)
OK A functional Inverter board is installed in this slot position.
FUSE The Inverter board in this position has a blown fuse but is still usable by the generator.
DUMMY A Dummy board is installed in this inverter slot position and the output kW is
therefore derated.
BAD The Inverter board in this position is in unusable condition. The output kW is
therefore derated.
STOP Unusual condition, the generator won't allow exposures. Verify the corresponding
Inverter board inside the generator.
o I/O zone: Gives the status of the different programmable inputs and outputs for the given
generator's state shown in the State zone.

7.5.3.2 History Log

This screen presents different events that occurred during the operation of the generator; the events
being tracked and logged in a FLASH memory and also displayed in service mode (Section 7.5.2.5).
Figure 7.13 below shows that events are encoded using a 2 byte-code (6F, 7B, 21, …etc), are
accompanied of a description (History Deleted; New Configuration Loaded,….), the IGBT status
(5000, 5900, ….) at the time the event was logged (June 28, 2006) and the devices that have captured
the events (XRAY µp, CIO µp or CON µp).
The data column displays internal information only.
Figure 7.13 – History Log of the Epsilon PC Tools' Service Module.
History data must be fetched from the generator using the Query button when the PC is connected
to the generator. The log can be deleted (Delete) or it can be exported (Export) as a text file for
later reference. When the log is deleted, all events are deleted from the log and the following statistic
figures (displayed in Service mode, see Section 7.5.2.7) are zeroed:
1. Maximum Tube H.U.;
2. Tube H.U. greater than 100%;
3. Tube Housing;
4. Over KV;
5. Maximum Inverter Temperature.

Other information or actions can be obtained from the History Log screen:
Set Date and Time: Use this button to synchronize the generator clock with the PC.
Exposure Counters: Number of exposures done on both filaments.
Firmware: Names, part numbers and revision numbers of installed firmware.
Arc Counters: Number of tube arcs (for AG, AK and KG figures).
AG : Anode-to-Ground arcs
AK : Anode-to-Cathode arcs
KG : Cathode-to-Ground arcs.
Inv. Max. Temp.: The maximum temperature every 3-Phase Inverter board has reached
during the history log period.
HU Max.: Number of times an exposure was not allowed because it would otherwise
have exceeded the Maximum Tube Heat Units.
HU 100%: Number of occurrences of Tube Heat Units greater than a hundred
percent.
Housing: Number of occurrences of Tube Housing Inhibit conditions.
Over kV: Number of occurrences of Over KV fault.
Power Quality The Power Quality figure has an effect over the maximum kW admitted
for an exposure. The power quality percent is measured and refreshed
during idle mode. It varies from about 80% to about 125% and is based on
the following instantaneous four (4) measurements or values:
1. Number of good Inverters.
2. Maximum kW Figure set in the generator configuration thru
the Options setup in Epsilon PC Tools.
3. Instantaneous Line Voltage.
4. Measured Line Impedance.
• When the power quality figure reaches or exceeds 100%, the generator will be capable of
doing the most demanding exposure based on the maximum power output of the
generator configuration and inverter board status.
• When the power quality figure falls below 100%, the generator might not be capable of
doing certain demanding exposures. This could be the result of a bad Inverter, a bad line
condition, too much impedance on line or other. When the generator inhibits a kW-
demanding exposure, it displays the message “Generator kW Limit” at the operator
console.

7.5.3.3 Tube Calibration Viewer

In Epsilon's Service tools, the Tube Calibration Viewer permits to visualize the different tube
emission calibration curves existing in the generator or on a computer. The different curves (up to 9)
represent the plotting of the tube current mA versus the tube filament current (A), for a given focal
spot and kV station (in Figure 7.14, large focal spot and nine kV stations).
The curves can be obtained from the generator using the Get from generator button or loaded
from a computer using the Load from file button. Once the tube calibration curves are obtained
from the generator, they can be stored to a connected PC using the Save to file button.
Figure 7.14 – Tube Calibration Viewer of the Epsilon PC Tools' Service Module.
It is also possible to transfer the tube calibration from a connected computer to the generator, using
the Send to generator button. This last action should be used very wisely, as it is not intended to replace
a tube calibration process. Doing a tube calibration is normal and unavoidable from time to time as the
characteristics of the tube vary with aging. Before sending a tube calibration file to the generator, make sure
that the tube chart of the sent tube matches the tube physically installed on the generator and configured in Tube Setup
of Epsilon PC Tools.
To Tube Calibration Viewer is best used by using the right mouse button to zoom in or out, display
the coordinates of a specific curve's point at the location of the cursor (Show Cursor), or print the
picture. The curve coordinates (x and y) are displayed using the scientific notation, for example:
x= 5.385E+00
y = 6.389E+02

7.5.3.4 Generator Calibration Module

Use the Generator Calibration module to edit certain parameters on the generator or to save
calibration data on computer (Figure 7.15).
Figure 7.15 –Generator Calibration Module

(shown here with High Performance Pulsed Fluoro).
Calibration data consists of different information such as the Fluoro Maximum dose allowed, certain
console parameters (brightness, volume& contrast), the software A/D device gain factors for RAD
and Fluoro ABS stabilization, and others. When you open this screen for the first time, make sure
to get data from the generator first before doing any change or saving to disk. Sending wrong
data to the generator can compromise the Fluoro entrance dose, the image stabilization or kV
and mA accuracies.
Line Impedance/AEC Calibration/KV & mA Calibration

These parameters are either used internally or not used at all.
BAUD Rate
Leave this parameter at 57600 unless the communication fails. If necessary, change the baud rate.

Console Parameters
Use the Console parameters section to adjust any of the following setups.
a. The Operator Console Language : Defaulted to English as main language and French as
second language. Note that French second language can be changed to most any language by the
client using the Roman, Greek or Cyrillic alphabet. Refer to Section 4.8.2.
b. Contrast, Volume and Brightness parameters: Adjustable for better operator console visibility
and listening. These parameters can also be set using the console service menu (see Section 4.8).
c. mAs Copy Factor: Used in console software version 9811.03 only. The "Copy Fluoro Factors"
function is available in manual Pulsed Fluoro. In that mode, depressing F1 function key sets up
the RAD technique in two-point (mAs) mode with the kV equals to the actual Fluoro kV. The
RAD mAs parameter is a multiple of the actual Fluoro mAs; that factor can be modified by
depressing F1 key for a moment and by using the mAs Factor Setup menu or by using the “mAs
Copy factor” slider. The factor varies from 1.6 up to 10.0.
d. “Info Display” selection: Used to default one of the six possible data to be displayed to the
operator in the Information Display area (Figure 7.16). This information can be changed at any
moment by the operator, using the left-hand third selection key (I.D.A. key) on the console
Figure 7.16 – Graphic screen on the Epsilon Operator Console. Different information can be
displayed in the Information display area using the IDA key.

7.5.4 Diagnostic Points

Use this section to explore the different diagnostic points available on the Controller board and
elsewhere. Diagnostic points are test points, LEDs, jumpers.
7.5.4.1 Controller Board P/N 9798.01
Figure 7.17 – Controller board P/N 9798.01.

Test Points:
Table 84- Test Points on Controller Board
Test Point Description Range / Scaling
TP1(*) Voltage Controlled Oscillator 0–5V
TP2(**) kV Total 1 V = + 40 kV
TP3(**) kV Anode 1 V = + 20 kV
TP4(**) kV Cathode 1 V = - 20 kV
TP5 kV Select 1 V = + 40 kV
TP9 Tube current 1 V = 250 mA
TP10(**) Tube current ITUBE < 50 mA => 1 V = 15.6 mA
ITUBE > 50 mA => 1 V = 250 mA
TP6(*) Clock Inverter Phase Square pulses α Phase frequency ( Freq=> Power)
1 Hz @ TP6 = 2 Hz Ripple Frequency on Inverters
TP11(*) Permanent clock inverter Square pulses α Main frequency ( Freq=> Power)
TP12(*) Clock Inverter Main Square pulses α Main frequency ( Freq=> Power)
TP7 Main I FIL. feedback 1V=1A
TP13 Filament enabled 5 V = Filaments enabled (Normal state)
0 V = Filament Disabled (Filament Fault)
TP8 Standby IFIL. feedback 1V=1A
TP16 Main I FIL. select 1V=2A
TP14/15 mAs meter +/– Use an mAs meter to read the real tube mAs
TP17(**) Main gate 5 V = X-ray On ; 0 V = X-ray Off
TP18 Ground 0 VDC
TP19(*) I/F frequency ITUBE < 60 mA => 100 kHz = 1 A
ITUBE > 60 mA => 1.6 kHz = 1 mA
TP20(*) AEC EOX
= AEC End of exposure
TP21 Not used ---
TP22 Client I/O ground Client I/O ground
TP23(*) CPU EOX
= End of exposure (Fault)
TP24 Ready to expose (I/O’s) 5 V = OK to expose ; 0 V = Inhibit exposure
TP25 EIP Not used
TP26 Not used ---
TP27(**) AEC/ABS ramp: 0.1 to 4 VDC 1.0 V = 100% Brightness or normal density
When the film density is modified by a factor or when film/screen correction is applied, the
voltage read at TP27 at the end of exposure is modified by the same factor or correction.
(*) For emd technologies usage only. (**) See also typical waveforms in Figure 7.18.

Typical Waveforms:
Typical Exposure @ 100 kV, 500 mA Typical Exposure @ 100 kV (Anode + Cathode)
Typical Exposure @ 100 kV, 500 mA Typical AEC Exposure @ 100 kV
Figure 7.18 – Controller board P/N 9798.01.
Typical AEC Exposure @ 40 kV

LEDs on Controller board:
Table 85- Diagnostic LEDs on Controller Board

LED Description
CR11 Lights on = Mains AC power applied to the generator controller
"Standby" Turned off = Controller power is off. WARNING - Lethal voltage may still be present.
Verify LEDs on 3-Phase Inverter boards before removing covers or servicing.
CR34 Led blinks = I/O µC operation is OK
Led lights on = I/O µC failure
CR35 Led blinks = XRAY µC operation is OK
Led lights on = XRAY µC failure
CR37 Not used
CR38 Not used
Input Voltage Reference & Threshold – J9 Connector:

The generator is shipped with a pull-up
voltage of +5 VDC (J9- pins 1 and 2 jumped)
for referencing the input terminals.
The pull-up can be changed to +12 VDC by

moving the jumper to between positions 2
and 3. The input voltage threshold value will
then be half the value of the reference
VTH = V REF/2
J9 jumper Threshold input voltage

Pins 1-2 = +2.5 VDC
Pins 2-3 = +6 VDC
7.5.4.2 3-Phase Inverter Boards P/N 9736.01
When LEDs on top of the 3-Phase Inverter boards are lit or blink, dangerous and lethal potentials are
present in offline circuits in several places of these boards! High Voltage, AC line-connected
potentials are present in these circuits. Do not manipulate these boards in this condition.
Generator Power On LED:
When the "AC Power" LED lights green on the High-Voltage Power Supply unit, on top of the Line
Filter board, dangerous and lethal potentials are present in offline circuits inside the generator! High
Voltage, AC line-connected potentials are present in these circuits. Make sure that the
generator enclosure is installed before operating the unit.

Figure 7.19 –
Warning LEDs on Inverter Boards P/N 9736.01 and
on X-Ray Control Panel.
7.5.4.3 Optional Fluoro Boards

• Potentiometers available on Fluoro PMT board P/N 9822.00 (Table 86).
• Jumpers available on Fluoro PhD board P/N 11030.000:
o J8: Leave jumper in position 1-2
o J10: Jumper in position 1-2: Normal gain for photodiode
Jumper in position 2-3: Low (slower) gain for photodiode
Table 86- Fluoro PMT Board Adjustment

Diagnostic points Description
R7, R8, R10, R11, R16 Fluoro Dose Stabilization/AEC Brightness (Section 5.5)
Pot. R38 Do not tamper with this pot.

7.5.4.4 Anode Starter Board

On the Anode Starter, a two LED-display (one green and one red LED) provides indication on the
current operative condition. Both LEDs flash simultaneously 5 times when the system is turned on.
To prevent accidental fault detection when error is detected, the starter maintains its current
operative status (I/Os to generator) and tries to restart 3 times; if it fails to restart normally, then the
fault is latched and can be deciphered on the LED display (Table 87).
Table 87- Troubleshooting Guide

Flashes: The starter system operates normally.
Green LED
Lights on: DC brake condition
Red LED The red led is used as a two-digit code to signal fault conditions (See below).
X1 X2 2 bit-CODE (X1 & X2) Fault Description
1 1 Hardware Fault Defective H.S. Starter (Contact Manufacturer)
1 2 Overtime Fault Too long boost or brake time
1 4 Stator Inversed Fault Tube Phase current is higher than Main current
1 5 I_Both_Too_Low Tube Main and Phase current too low
1 6 Tube Main current too low 1. The main is not connected to the H.S. Starter
2. Bad stator model, bad stator impedance
1 7 Tube Phase current too low 1. The Phase wire is not connected to the H.S. Starter
2. Bad stator model, bad stator impedance
2 1 No Line Fuse is blown; Refer to Section 7.6.4.2 for fuse replacement.
2 2 VC1 Unbalance Maximum allowed voltage exceeded on Rail
3 1 DC Unregulated DC Voltage out of Positive tolerance
5 1 Illogical Operation User Interface requested illogical sequence
(Refer to Section 5.1.1)

In a fault condition, the red LED 2-bit code pattern is repeated continuously. The code can be
interpreted as follows:
1. X1 pulses of 250 ms on red LED where the number of pulses X1 indicates the decimal
number of the first digit.
2. 1/2 s delay between first and second digits.
3. X2 pulses of 250 ms on red LED where the number of pulses X2 indicates the decimal
number of the second digit.
4. 2 second-pause.
5. Steps 1 to 4 are repeated.
7.5.4.5 Optional Cable Discharge Interface Board P/N 11206.000

This optional board is present on certain EPS cardiac configurations.
Table 88- Diagnostic LEDs on Cable Discharge Interface board

JJ1
1BB–
–LLEED
D Lights yellow when cable discharge unit is enabled (*);
JJ1
1CC–
–LLEED
D Lights green during X-ray on
JJ2
2BB–
–LLEED
D Lights yellow when fans are on
J2C–LED Not used
(*) The cable discharge unit is enabled when:
• The Cable Discharge Interface Board is properly set in system RJ45 Connector
configuration (Epsilon PC Tools); J2B (Yellow)
• Temp. at cable discharge assembly is less than < 160 °F (70°C). J2C (not used)
J1B (Yellow)
J1C (Green)

7.6 REPLACEMENT OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
Before replacing a board inside the High-Voltage generator, make sure the generator power is turned
off at the mains entry panel for at least 5 minutes before removing the top panel of the generator
for board replacement.
Do not install or remove any component or board when the
power is on. Even when the generator is switched off at the
operator console, mains voltages are still present in High-
Voltage Power Supply unit. These voltages are extremely
dangerous, use utmost caution.-
Figure 7.20 – EPS Generator Components Interconnection.

7.6.1 Three-Phase Inverter Board & EPS Starter Board Replacement
• For the 45-80 kW configuration, the number of 3-Phase Inverter boards varies
from 3 to 6. In this configuration, no empty slots should be allowed in the 3-Phase
Inverter board locations. Any missing board should be replaced by a "Dummy
Inverter Jumper Board", P/N 9930.00.
• For the 30 kW configuration, only two 3-Phase Inverter boards are present on the
generator (no other boards in positions 3 thru 6).
1. Make sure the generator is turned off at the mains line disconnect box.
2. Make sure the generator is completely discharged.

Verify that the power-on LED lamp on the High-Voltage Power Supply unit is turned off. If the
generator enclosure is removed, verify that all "Live Terminals Present" LEDs on the 3-Phase
Inverter boards are switched off (see Figure below). If not, wait a few moment until the lamps
are all turned off (this might take a few minutes). These LEDs are also visible through the
enclosure openings.
Figure 7.21 – 3-Phase Inverter Board P/N 9736.01.

Warning ! When LEDs on top of the Inverter boards are lit or blink, dangerous and lethal
potentials are present in offline circuits in several places of these boards! High Voltage,
AC line-connected potentials are present in these circuits. Do not manipulate these
boards in this condition.
3. On the Power Supply unit, remove the screws

as shown in Figure below.
4. Carefully take off the two top

panels of the generator by using
great care of not touching any
internal components. Verify that all
"Live Terminals Present" LEDs on the Inverter
boards are switched off (Figures 7.21 & 7.23). If
not, wait a few moment until the lamps are
all turned off (this might take a few
minutes).
5. Take off the Inverter Board Retainer

(item 2 in Figure 7.23) from the card
cage by lifting them upward.
Figure 7.22 –
Access panels of Epsilon generator.
6. Use the card ejectors on the two

extremities of the board to unplug and
extract the board from the fuse clip
connectors on the motherboard. Take the board out
of the card cage by pulling it vertically. Do not pull on an Inverter’s heat sinks to unclip the board off the
motherboard.
Use Figure 7.24 to locate the board positions on the Motherboard plane.
7. Reinstall the new board within the card slots and press it firmly downward to make sure the
ejectors clip in and the connection with the Motherboard is secured. Do not push 3-Phase Inverter
boards using their heat sinks.
Note: It is recommended to respect the board order identified on the Motherboard (Figure 7.24).
8. Reinstall the Inverter Board Retainer between the heat sinks as shown in Figure 7.23.
9. If 3-Phase Inverter boards were replaced, it is imperative to update the Inverter Board
Status register. Refer to Section 7.5.2.6 – Inverter Board Status Register Updating – to update
the register.
3
4
2
1
1. Card Ejector (x 12); 2. Inverter Boards Retainer (x 1); 3. Anode Starter board (x 1);
4. Three-Phase Inverter Board (3-6).
Note: Any missing Inverter board should be replaced by a Dummy Inverter Jumper board, (except
for EPS 30 kW generators).
Figure 7.23 – Top view of EPS 45-80 High-Voltage generator.
10. Before replacing the covers, do a power on test to validate the installation.
Warning ! Lethal High Voltage, AC line-connected potentials are present

on many components inside the generator power supply. Do not touch any
component when power is applied and covers are off the generator.
11. Turn off the generator using the console power off button. Turn all powers off and wait five
minutes to completely discharge the generator. Replace the two panels on the top of the
generator.

BACK OF EPSILON GENERATOR
FRONT OF EPSILON GENERATOR
Figure 7.24 – Replaceable PCBs on the Motherboard (Top view).

Note: the number of Inverter boards varies from 2 to 6 according to the Epsilon configuration.

7.6.2 Generator Basket Replacement

7.6.2.1 Preliminary Step (Generator Configuration Data Backup)
As the replacement of the basket will result in the reloading of the firmware and the configuration
data, it is necessary to create a back up of the generator set up before proceeding with the hardware
replacement. Refer to Section 8.2.3.5.
Important
If the Controller board is in trouble and the firmware cannot be read, remember that a
backup of the installation should exist in virtue of the Installation procedure.
Refer to Section 8.2.3.5 or to Section 4.2.3.2.
7.6.2.2 Replacement Procedure

Before replacing the basket inside the High-Voltage generator, make sure the generator power is
turned off at the mains entry panel for at least 5 minutes.
Do not install or remove any component or board when

the power is on. Even when the generator is switched off
at the operator console, mains voltages are still present in
High-Voltage Power Supply unit. These voltages are
extremely dangerous, use the utmost caution.-
2. Disconnect all cables from the Controller board.
3. Take off any optional board from the Expansion Motherboard (Fluoro board, Relay board).
4. On the generator, remove all screws encircled in Figure 7.25 below.
5. Follow all steps as described in Figure 7.26 through Figure 7.34.
6. Disconnect all cables located inside the basket (Figure 7.29 and Figure 7.30).
1. Power supply 4. Filament (small and large)
2. Filament (small and large) 5. Anode connector (P18) from J18
3. Cathode connector (P17) from J17 6. Cathode connector (P19) from J19

Figure 7.25 – Replacement of EPS 45-80 Generator Basket (1/10).

Push the assembly downward to disconnect the Controller from the Motherboard connector.


Detail of top connector when disconnected

Pull the assembly out of the generator to remove it.

Cathode
Anode
J19
Power Supply
Controller
J17 J18

Undo all internal connections.
Large Filament
Push to
release
Small Filament

Filament Connections (no polarity to be respected for these connections).

7. On the new basket, reconnect the cables that were undone in step 6.
a. Reconnect first the four (4) filament cables (small and large).
b. Place the cables so that they will run at the bottom of the chassis assembly after the basket
is placed to its final position (see 1, Figure 7.31).
8. Reconnect the power supply cable. Place the cable so that it runs at the bottom of the chassis
assembly when the basket will be placed to its final position (see 2, Figure 7.31).
9. Reconnect all cables to the High Voltage units.

a. Make sure the cables do no cross high-frequency connection cables (see 3, Figure 7.31).
b. Make sure cables P17, P18, P19 are properly connected (see 4, Figure 7.31).
3 3
1
2

Reconnection of cables on the EPS 45-80 Generator Basket.
10. Flip the basket assembly back to its position in the chassis assembly (see Figures 7.32 thru 7.34).
Be careful of not pinching the cables when reassembling the basket in position


Ideal positioning of cables before flipping back the basket into position.
11. Place the basket assembly toward the main chassis and move it upward to insert the top
connector (Figure 7.33).

Final verification before closing the assembly.


Position before connecting the assembly to the Motherboard.
12. On the generator, reinstall all screws taken out in step 4 (Figure 7.25).
13. Reconnect all cables on the Controller board.
14. If any, reinstall the board(s) on the Expansion Motherboard (Fluoro board, Relay board, ..).
7.6.2.3 Firmware Upload and Final Verification

When the generator is finally assembled as per the previous section instructions, it is now time to
upload the firmware in the generator.
1. Refer to Section 7.6.5 to upload the firmware, if necessary.
2. Take note of all firmware versions (Section 7.5.2.4):

i. Select “System”, “Monitor” and then “Soft. Rev”.
ii. Browse thru the firmware versions that are installed on the generator and verify they
match the table you completed before (Section 7.6.2.1).
3. Perform the field calibration before resuming to normal operation.
Field Calibration Refer to

X-ray Tube Calibration Section 5.2
Fluoroscopic Entrance Exposure Rate Section 5.4
Fluoroscopic Dose Stabilization (verification) Section 5.5

7.6.3 Optional Boards Replacement

These boards are easily replaced as they are only plugged into the Expansion Motherboard. There
are no bolts and nuts to play with.
Before replacing a board onto the High-Voltage generator:

• Make sure the generator power is turned off at the mains entry panel for at least 5 minutes
before removing the top panel of the generator for board replacement.
Do not install or remove any component or board when the
power is on. Even when the generator is switched off at the
operator console, mains voltages are still present in High-
Voltage Power Supply unit. These voltages are extremely
dangerous, use the utmost caution.-
7.6.3.1 Fluoro Board Replacement

2. Verify that the Power-ON neon lamp on the High-Voltage Power Supply unit is turned off.
3. Undo all connections on the Fluoro PMT board.
4. Replace the old Fluoro PMT board with the new one.
5. Reinstall the connections.
6. Perform the following field calibration before resuming to normal operation of the generator.
Field Calibration Refer to

Fluoroscopic Entrance Exposure Rate Section 5.4
Fluoroscopic Dose Stabilization (verification) Section 5.5
7.6.3.2 Anode Starter Board : Refer to Section 7.6.1.
7.6.3.3 Relay Board and Miscellaneous boards

2. Verify that the Power-ON neon lamp on the High-Voltage Power Supply unit is turned off.
3. Undo all connections on the board to be replaced.
4. Replace the old board with the new board and reinstall the connections.
5. Restart the generator and verify that it works properly.

7.6.4 Fuse and Battery Replacement

7.6.4.1 Battery Function and Replacement
The battery is used as a time keeper device for the calculation of the anode heat units and the
Inverter Boards temperature, to place a date stamp on each entry in the system fault log and finally,
for keeping track of the exposure counter registers.
The battery has a useful life time of about 10 years. When replacement is necessary, a message is
displayed on the operator console. To replace the battery:
1. Turn off all powers to the generator.
2. Take off the Controller Access Panel, as seen in Figure 7.35 below (4 screws to undo).
Locating pin
Battery, shown upside down
Controller Access Panel Schematic representation of battery
Figure 7.35 –
Replacement of Battery on the Controller.
<= Controller Board
3. Pull the battery firmly upward out of its socket.
4. To replace the battery, use the following part number: M4T32-BR12SH Lithium Battery
(120mAh, ST Manufacturer). The battery can be inserted in its socket in only one way as it is pin
oriented by a locating pin (see above Figure, right).
5. Replace the Controller Access Panel.

7.6.4.2 Fuse Replacement

1. Turn off all powers to the generator.
2. For replacement of an Inverter board fuse, refer to Section 7.6.1 to take out the 3-Phase
Inverter board. Pay great attention to all precautions given in that section.
Inverter Board Fuses: If one fuse is blown on the 3-Phase Inverter board, you should
consider replacing it. Replace a fuse on an Inverter board only when the Inverter Board Status
indicates “FUSE” (Section 7.5.2.6). Refer also to Section 7.5.2.6 to update the Inverter board
register in the Service Mode. Change the status from FUSE to OK and press “Save” key.
3. To replace a fuse, use the following part number and/or fuse rating:
Inverter Board Fuses:

Fast Acting Midget Fuses 20AMPS 500VAC/DC,
Dimensions: 13/32” diameter x 13/8” length (10 x 38 US).
Line Filter Board Fuses:

F1 & F2: 5A, 500VAC:
MINIATURE FUSE 5AMPS 500VAC,
Dimensions: 1/4” diameter x 1 1/4” length (6.35 mm x 32 mm).
F3 & F4: Fuses installed only when the Auxiliary Power Supply option is fitted
on the generator (Fast Acting MIDGET Fuses 2A 500VAC/DC).
Epsilon Anode Starter Board Fuses:

F1, F2,
FAST ACTING MIDGET FUSE 20AMPS 500VAC/DC,
Dimensions: 13/32” diameter x 1 3/8” length (10.3 mm x 35 mm) (10 x 38 US).
Motherboard Fuses:
F1, F2, F3
MINIATURE FUSE 5AMPS 500VAC,
Dimensions: 1/4” diameter x 1 1/4” length (6.35 mm x 32 mm).
4. Restart the generator and verify that it works properly.

7.6.5 Software Update

7.6.5.1 Firmware & Epsilon PC Tools
Use the following procedure to update the software on an installed Epsilon generator. The Epsilon
software consists of three firmware S19 files (S19 file format: low-level machine code and addresses)
and one Epsilon PC Tools executable file.
° (1) X-ray P/N 9809.01, (2) CIO P/N 9810.01 Unbreakable
and (3) Console P/N 9811.xx firmwares Software
° Epsilon PC Tools Program P/N 9893.01 Group
The four items form a group, and an element of one group or revision cannot be mixed with an
element of another group or revision. When updating a firmware, make sure that it is compatible
with the other two firmwares and with the current Epsilon PC Tools revision. If necessary, call emd
technologies for additional information, or verify the software compatibility on your customer web
page.
Epsilon Loader
No
tes
This module, when used inappropriately, can lead to serious or fatal impairment
of the generator. Do not use this module unless you are sure to have a backup or
an adequate copy of the generator firmware (Section 8.2.3.5).
Updating the CIO or Console firmware will result in the replacement of important
configuration data! Make sure to have a backup of the generator configuration data before
loading new software.
Firmware Devices Important Notes
9810.01.S19 CIO Will reset all the hardware setup, the tube calibration and the Fluoro dose
calibration.
9809.01.S19 X-RAY Configuration data not replaced.
9811.xx.S19 Console Will replace all APR data by the cold load parameters.
If you do not have the firmware and Epsilon PC Tools with you on a CD or on your laptop, you
will have to download them from emd technologies web site using the following procedure:
a. Go to the emd web site : www.emd-technologies.com

b. Enter your Client Name in the Customer Name Zone and click on OK.
c. Enter your password and click on Submit.
Note: Client Names & passwords are case sensitive!
d. You will get access to the latest documentation and software/firmware available for your application.
e. Download the “Epsilon PC Tools.exe” and save this file on a specific folder.
f. Download the Firmware zip file (Firmware.XX.ddmmm.yy.Zip) on the same folder.
XX=04 => RAD-only firmware package; XX=05 => RF firmware package
g. Extract the zip file into its three (3) firmware constituents: XRAY, CIO and CON.

Epsilon Loader
1. Make sure the X-ray tube anode is not rotating. If necessary, brake it.
2. Connect the generator to the PC using a RS-232 data cable or USB

printer cable, depending on the console.
3. Open the Epsilon PC Tools program and start the Epsilon Loader
module by using Tools and Update Software (Figure 7.36).
< Update Software Launcher

Epsilon Loader Module >
Figure 7.36 –
4. Choose the communication port (COM1 or COM2) and baud rate to be

used to transfer the data.
5. Click the Start button to enable the process.
6. Click on the appropriate Update device firmware button (CIO, XRAY or CONSOLE) to
launch the data transfer from the PC to the generator.
Note: CIO2, XRAY2 devices are used only on a biplane generator configuration.
CONSOLE2 device is not used on standard generator configurations.
7. Select the desired firmware version to be put into the µprocessor and click OK. Repeat, if
necessary, for the other firmware devices.
8. Once finished, click on the Exit button to terminate the process.

Loading Failure: If a failure occurs or the PC to generator connection opens during the
course of the upload process, the upload process aborts and the generator won’t be
functional until the power is cycled off/on at the operator console and the firmware is
loaded again.

7.6.5.2 Options Chip P/N 11037.xxx
2. Make sure the generator is completely discharged.
3. Refer to Section 7.6 to remove the Inverter boards (or Dummy board, if any)
from positions # 2, 4 and 6.
4. Locate the Options chip in position U1, between

inverter sockets 4 and 6.
Epsilon Options
Chip
5. Remove the chip and replace it with the new

one. Take care at the chip key (pin #1).
pin1
Figure 7.37 – U1 Options Chip on the Motherboard.
6. Reinstall the Inverters (or Dummy boards).

When reinstalling the boards within the card slots, press them firmly downward to make sure
the ejectors clip in and the connection with the Motherboard is secured. Do not push 3-Phase
Inverter boards using their heat sinks.
7. Use Epsilon PC Tools program to change the software options of the generator. The generator
needs to know that new software features are now installed. Refer to Chapter 4.

7.7 THEORY OF OPERATION
7.7.1 Functional Blocks

The following functional block diagrams are provided as a high level explanation of the principles of
operation for the Epsilon HF High-Voltage generators.
7.7.1.1 kV Output
Figure 7.38 – Principles of Operation: Production & Control of Output kV.

7.7.1.2 Power Supply
Figure 7.39 – Principles of Operation: Power Supply.
Console Power On and Off Function

Two normally open momentary push button switches are used, one for power on and one for power
off for the generator.
• The common pin of both switches is tied to pin 8 of connector J7.
• The second pin of the On-switch is tied through a 470 ohm 1/4 watt resistor to pin 15 of
connector J7.
• The second pin of the Off-switch is tied through a 10k ohm 1/4 watt resistor to pin 15 of
connector J7.
• The two switches, the two resistors and the associated traces are kept isolated from all other
signals in the console.

7.7.1.3 mA Control
Figure 7.40 – Principles of Operation: mA Control.
7.7.1.4 Filament Selection
Figure 7.41 – Principles of Operation: Filament Selection.

7.7.2 Description of AEC Modes

The generator provides two kinds of AEC modes regarding the management of the exposure
backup time. The user decides of which way the generator works by setting or clearing a bit on
PC Tools Program (Figure 7.42).
− Configurable Backup Time (Section 7.7.2.1)
− Hidden Backup Time (Section 7.7.2.2)
− Falling Load (Section 7.7.2.3)
An optional falling load mode is also

possible in AEC 2-point mode.
Figure 7.42 – RAD Options in

PC Tools Options module.
7.7.2.1 User Configurable Backup Time AEC Mode

This mode is active when the Hidden AEC Backup option is cleared. The user can select the value
of the back-up time in AEC/mA technique and the value of the back-up mAs in AEC/mAs
technique. These values are displayed in the seven segment time/mAs display before the exposure is
performed.
7.7.2.2 Hidden Backup Time AEC Mode

This mode is active when the Hidden AEC Backup bit option is set.
AEC Exposure using kV & mA factors

1. The value of kV comes from the exam and is
keyboard modifiable by the user.
2. The value of mA comes from the exam and is keyboard modifiable by the user.
3. The value of the back up time is fixed by the generator and cannot be modified directly by the
user.
4. The generator chooses the largest value possible for the back up time based on the filament
rating, the anode speed, exposure kV, exposure mA, frame rate and run length.
a. As the user modifies any exposure values, the generator re-calculates the largest possible
back up time. The value of the backup time can be displayed on the console, if wanted, on
the graphics display area.
b. In the case of Auto Filament and / or Auto Speed, a switch over is made when the (back
up time) is greater than 1.25 times the ideal mAs time from the exam.
c. The seven segment time display on the console is empty until an exposure is performed at
which moment the display will show the actual exposure time with a flashing decimal point.
The time display returns empty when any console key or footswitch is pressed.

AEC Exposure using kV & Back-Up mAs factors

1. The value of kV comes from the exam and is
keyboard modifiable by the user.
2. The value of BUT is derived from the ideal mAs time in the exam (2 time stations above TIDEAL)
by the generator and cannot be modified by the user.
3. The value of mA is calculated by the generator to be the largest value possible based on the BUT
calculated above, the selected kV, filament rating, the anode speed, frame rate and run length.
4. This mA value will be re-calculated each time any exposure parameter is changed and cannot be
modified by the user.
5. In the case of Auto Filament and / or Auto Speed, a switch over is made whenever the
calculated mA is smaller than the "exam mA".
6. The seven segment mA-mAs display will be empty until an exposure is performed at which
moment the display will show the actual exposure mAs with a flashing decimal point. The mA-
mAs display will return dark when any console key or foot switch is pressed.
7. The value of mAs could be displayed in the graphic display, as in any mAs mode.
7.7.2.3 Falling Load Mode

This mode is active when the Falling Mode bit option is set in PC
Tools/Options. The falling load function is usable only in single
exposure A.E.C. 2-point mode. When enabled, all AEC-mAs
exposures (in single exposure mode) will be performed with falling
load if the conditions shown below are met. All other exposures will
be performed with normal functionality. When falling load is active,
a clear indication is visible on the console.
Figure 7.43 – AEC Falling Mode Enabled

displayed on the console.
Falling load exposure parameters of interest are:

kV select = kVS
Back up mAs = BUmAs
mAs Ideal time = tI
Selection of other exposure parameters: The normal mAs calculator is used to determine mA and
time for parameters given mANOM & tBU
1. If tBU < tI, then mA = mANOM => The falling load function is off;
2. If tBU < τFIL then mA = mANOM => The falling load function is off;
Hence, when tBU larger than tI and τFIL => The falling load function is on.

In falling load mode, the normal mA/t calculator is used to determine mA max and mA min for
exposure:
Maximum mA for exposure of 0.7 * τFIL = mA(HIGH);
Minimum mA for exposure => mA(LOW) = mANOM2/mA(HIGH);
The falling load function is on.
Notes:
i. When falling load is active, if real mA <
mA(LOW), the filament loop will start
regulating to mA(LOW).;
ii. τFIL = 66% filament inertia time (τ = Tau)
Figure 7.44 – Filament inertia displayed in

Service module of Epsilon PC Tools.
7.7.3 Generator Calibration and Configuration Data
7.7.3.1 Summary of Data

Calibration/configuration data for the Epsilon generator consists of:
1. APR tree and exam data (stored in the Console)
emd file data
2. All generator configuration parameters (stored in the Client I/O)
tc file data 3. Tube calibration data
gc file data 4. Generator calibration data (stored in all three μC)
sl file data 5. Second Language data
7.7.3.2 Integrity of Data

All data transfers between Epsilon PC Tools and the EPS generator are protected by rigorous data
integrity checks and the measures described herein address events other than simple communication
errors.
Each time the generator receives an emd file from PC Tools, it verifies the manufacturer and part
number of the X-ray tube. If it is different from that saved during the last X-ray tube calibration, the
tube calibration table for both filaments are erased and the maximum Fluoro dose data is replaced
with the default values.
The emd file data stored in the console is limited to the APR tree and associated exam data. All of
the exam data can be modified by the user and saved in the console. Each exam sent from the
console to the generator is completely checked for suitability by the generator.

The emd file data in the Client I/O firmware is stored with an overall check sum fixed at the time
of data transfer from PC Tools. At power on and periodically during operation, the check sum is
verified and if an error is detected a message displays on the console. This error is extremely rare and
is similar to finding a check sum error in the code section of the flash memory. In the case of a code
check sum error, the processor enters the boot loader mode and the generator is unusable. With a
configuration check sum error, the generator is also unusable and Epsilon PC Tools must be used to
re-configure it. The following message displays:
Config. Data Corrupted
A gc file data (typical data shown opposite) is

stored with an overall check sum for the data in
each of the three micro-controllers and fixed at
the time of data transfer from PC Tools. At
power on and periodically during operation, the
check sums is verified and if an error is detected
a message displays and the corrupted data is replaced
with the default data. As with many other
information messages, any console key serve as
an acknowledgement in order to the generator to
continue normally. The major effect of reloading
default data visible to the user is that he is forced
to re-perform the Fluoro maximum dose
calibration. The default max Fluoro dose is very
low. The following message displays:
(X-Ray) or (Client I/O) or (Console) Default Loaded
A tc file data (typical data shown opposite) is

protected by a check sum for each connected filament.
The check sum is verified at power on and periodically
and if found bad the data is not used (about 2.0 amps
is presumed for all points of kV and mA) and the user
is warned that the filament is not calibrated. Any
console key serves as an acknowledgement in order to
the generator to continue normally.

7.7.4 Console Configuration & Communication

7.7.4.1 PC & Generator Link Types
PC
(Epsilon PC Tools)
A.
J16 Controller
PC Tools Communication
Between Laptop & Generator XRAY I/O µC
µC
RS-232
J4
CAN
USB
J7
J6
Console (CAN)
B. PC
J16 Controller (Epsilon PC Tools)
XRAY I/O µC
µC
C.
J16 Controller
J4
XRAY I/O µC
µC
J7 J4
PC
J6
(Epsilon PC Tools) Console (CAN)
J7
J6
Console
(RS232)
Figure 7.45 – Console Communication Patterns with PC and Epsilon generator.
NOTE: USB connection is available on Epsilon Operator Consoles P/N 9777.21 and above
only. For an operator console without USB support and when standard RS-232 serial port is not
available on the computer, an USB to serial adapter can be used to connect the computer or
notebook to the generator. Recommended devices are:
• Edgeport/1 USB Converter, by Digi ConnectwareTM
• GUC232A USB to Serial Adapter, by IOGEAR
• RS-232 Optical Isolator, by B & B electronics

7.7.4.2 Proprietary CANBUS Communication Protocol
Refer to Technical Manual Supplement P/N 11050.0008 in the electronic

documentation CD. If necessary, contact emd technologies.
7.8 CONFIDENCE TEST
Before leaving a site after an intervention, the service representative can perform the following tests
to make sure the system works fine.
1. Perform the exposure tests of Section 5.3 (Output kV and mAs Verification) on the small and
large filaments.
2. Perform Fluoro in ABS mode and verify the image stabilizes using different phantom sizes (1
mm and 2 mm Cu are suggested).
3. Perform Fluoro at maximum kV for 1-minute long.
4. Perform an A.E.C. exposure and verify the exposure does not terminate by BUT.

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

8.0 MAINTENANCE
IN THIS CHAPTER :
8.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................... 8-3

8.2.1 Periodic Cleaning....................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Exposure Indicators.................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.2.1 RAD Exposure Indicators ................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.2.2 “Deadman” Exposure Switch........................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2.3 Fluoro Indicators ................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.2.4 X-Ray Disable Switch ........................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.3 Annual Maintenance Procedure .............................................................................................. 8-4
8.2.3.1 Labels Inspection................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.3.2 Cable Tightness / Weariness ............................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.3.3 System Grounding Inspection .......................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.3.4 Field Calibrations................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.3.5 Generator Data Backup..................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.3.6 Validation of AEC Mode .................................................................................................. 8-6
8.3 PACKAGING AND SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................ 8-7
8.4 PARTS MANUAL .............................................................................................................................................. 8-8

8.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
A maintenance program is necessary to insure safe operation of the unit and to maintain the
Epsilon generator specifications. See table below to ensure proper maintenance of the generator at
regular time intervals.
Table 89-
Maintenance Schedule
Time Interval Description
Monthly 1. Cleaning the operator console (Section 8.2.1)
2. Verification of exposure Indicators (Section 8.2.2)
• Visual exposure indicator
• Audible exposure indicator
• Fluoro timer alarm
• Deadman exposure switch
Annual 1. Labels inspection (8.2.3.1)
2. Cable Tightness (8.2.3.2)
3. System Grounding Integrity (8.2.3.3)
4. Field Calibrations (8.2.3.4)
5. Generator Data Backup (Section 8.2.3.5)
6. Validation of AEC Mode (Section 8.2.3.6)
When necessary:
• System Backup 1. Perform a backup of the generator data (Section 8.2.3.5)
• At replacement of 2. Reset the Exposure Count registers (Section 7.5.3.1)

X-ray tube 3. Perform the X-ray tube calibration (Section 5.2)
4. Adjust the Fluoroscopic Maximum Entrance Exposure Rate (§ 5.4)
• At software update Refer to Section 7.6.5.

8. Maintenance
8.2 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
8.2.1 Periodic Cleaning
Warning
• Always switch off the mains power to the Epsilon generator and wait 5 minutes before
cleaning.
• Do not allow water or other liquids to enter the console or High-Voltage Power Supply unit
since this may cause short circuits or corrosion.
Epsilon Console: Spray cleaners or disinfectants are not recommended. Do not use abrasives,
solvents or corrosive cleaning or disinfecting agents. Clean painted parts with a clean cloth
dampened with a mild detergent solution. Clean the plastic faceplate with a clean cloth dampened
with a glass or plastic cleaner. Do not allow any liquid into switch recesses. Wipe the back panel and
connecting cable(s) with a moistened cloth.
High-Voltage Power Supply: It is recommended to remove the dust on the exposed panels of the
unit once a year using a vacuum cleaner.
8.2.2 Exposure Indicators
8.2.2.1 RAD Exposure Indicators
1. Press the PREP switch. Verify that the Prep lamp lights green to
indicate the preparation is under way for the current workstation.
When Prep is ready, the lamp starts blinking.
2. Press the RAD switch. Verify that the X-ray On lamp lights up yellow
during the emission of X-rays and turns off at the end.
3. Verify that the buzzer sounds (continuous alarm) during the exposure (if enabled) and turns
off at the end of the exposure.
8.2.2.2 “Deadman” Exposure Switch

1. Set the following three-point exposure: 60 kV, 40 mA and 4 seconds.
2. Press the PREP and Expose push-buttons.
3. Stop the exposure after approximately 2 seconds by releasing the exposure switch.
4. Verify that the exposure is immediately interrupted and the "End of EXP.: Operator" message is
displayed on the console.

8.2.2.3 Fluoro Indicators

Do Fluoro and verify that:
1. The EXP yellow lamp lights during Fluoro and turns off when the Fluoro footswitch is released.
2. The Fluoro Cumulated Timer functions. Make sure the timer stops when the Fluoro footswitch
is released. Verify the function of the [Timer Reset] key.
3. Verify that the alarm pulses (pulsed alarm) for the first 5 minutes and then changes for
continuous tone after 5 minutes of Fluoroscopy. Verify the function of the [Alarm Reset] key.
8.2.2.4 X-Ray Disable Switch

On certain operator consoles, an “X-Ray Disable” button allows to block the X-ray production.
Verify the functionality of this button.
8.2.3 Annual Maintenance Procedure
8.2.3.1 Labels Inspection

With all powers turned off, verify that the warning labels have not been defaced or worn so as to be
illegible.
8.2.3.2 Cable Tightness / Weariness

With all powers turned off, inspect the Interfacing cables and wires.
8.2.3.3 System Grounding Inspection

With all powers turned off, proceed with the grounding inspection (Section 2.7.2).
8.2.3.4 Field Calibrations

1. Perform the X-ray tube Calibration (Section 5.2).
2. Perform the Fluoroscopic Maximum Entrance Exposure Rate Calibration (Section 5.4).
3. Perform the Fluoro Dose Stabilization Calibration (Section 5.5).
4. The DAP Interface option, if present, shall be checked periodically. Refer to the DAP chamber
manufacturer & to the electronic document P/N 10050.014 to get the maintenance schedule &
program.

8. Maintenance
8.2.3.5 Generator Data Backup
The complete back up of the generator set-up data is held in 4 distinct files. Use the following
procedure to obtain the complete backup of the generator.
1. Start the generator in Service mode by holding down WS1 key while switching on the power on
the console. After the power cycle self test, the generator will enter into the service mode.
2. Connect the service laptop to the console J6 connector.
3. Start PC Tools program and choose “create a new configuration file” and click the OK
button. This will load a default file (untitled.emd) and load the “Options screen”.
4. Connect to the console with the computer by choosing “Transfer” and “Connect”. When
connected, the PC Tools status at the right side of the screen shows “Monitor/Transfer”. Click
again on “Transfer” and select “Get from generator”. The generator configuration set up shall
be transferred to your computer. When finished, the console shall return to the normal operator
mode, usually displaying the “WS1” menu.
5. emd File (*.emd): Save the generator data of this emd file by doing “File/Save as ….”.
Use a filename recognizable in the future.
6. LOG File (log.txt): Get now the History Log of the generator by clicking in
the menu bar “Tools” / “Service”/ “History Log” and then clicking the Query
button. Export this file (a text file) using the Export button; save it in a
recognizable location for future reference.
7. TC File (*.tc): Get now the Tube Calibration file from the generator by clicking in the menu
bar “Tools” / “Service”/ “Tube Calib Viewer” and clicking the Get from Generator button.
Save the file in a recognizable location on your computer for future reference
using the Save to file button.
8. GC File (*.gc): Get now the Generator Calibration file from the generator by
clicking in the menu bar “Tools” / “Service”/ “Generator Calibration” and
clicking the Get from Generator button. Save the file in a recognizable location on your
computer for future reference using the Save to file button.

8.2.3.6 Validation of AEC Mode
Perform this procedure to validate that the AEC mode is functional.
l- Quick method
1. Set-up the following 3-point AEC exposure: near 100 kV, 500 mA and 1.0 BUT.
2. By reducing the collimator aperture or by introducing aluminum phantom into the X-ray beam,
put enough filtration so that the exposure last for about 0.5 s.
3. Reduce the kV to about 60 kV.
4. Make an exposure and verify that the exposure is stopped by backup mAs detection (600 mAs).
5. Fully open the collimator (or take off the aluminum phantom).
6. Repeat the same AEC exposure and verify the exposure is stopped by phototiming feedback
(irradiation mA x time product less than 600 mAs).
ll- Detailed method for Ion Chamber AEC Device

1. Make certain that for the workstation being used that an ion chamber is selected as the AEC
device and that the ion chamber is in fact connected to the same connector as configured in the
workstation menu of Epsilon PC Tools.
2. Select a three point AEC exposure (kV - mA - BUT - BUmAs) with reasonable kV and mA and
a BUTime of 500ms. Select Medium Film Screen and all three fields ON.
3. Make a note of the Ion Chamber nominal voltage visible in the AEC menu of PC Tools for the
selected Ion Chamber for the Medium Film Screen. For these tests, place the correction table
values to all zeros for the medium film screen.
4. Connect an oscilloscope with one channel on Main Gate (TP17, Controller Board) and one
channel on pin 1 of the eight-pin connector where the Ion Chamber is connected. Trigger the
scope on the rise of Main Gate.
5. Attempt to perform an exposure.
Possible outcomes are:

i) The console displays “AEC/ABS DEVICE OPEN”
a) Check the voltage on Pin 1 of the Ion Chamber connector. If it is above a few tens of
millivolts, that implies that either the chamber is not connected properly or that the chamber
hardware is not configured properly. Verify the connections. If connections are OK, the problem
is with the hardware configuration. Go to the AEC Configuration Screen of Epsilon PC Tools
and for the Ion Chamber in use modify the hardware selections. For most common AID
chambers, the proper settings are:
Output High Voltage : 12 Volts
Reset Polarity : Reset
Field Polarity : Low Selected
b) BUT : Using the Ion Chamber users manual, verify that the configuration is correct for the
chamber being used. If the Ion Chamber signal (Pin 1 of the connector) is above a few tens of
millivolts before the exposure starts and it is properly connected then either the Output High
Voltage is set wrong for the chamber or, more likely, the reset polarity is incorrect.

8. Maintenance
ii) The exposure starts:

With the scope triggered on Main Gate rise the Ion Chamber signal must start near zero and
rise linearly during the exposure (while Main Gate is HIGH) This signal must be about a straight line
with a fixed slope and if so the exposure will stop when the signal reaches the value noted above
(step 3). A short time after the exposure stops the signal must return to near zero volts. If the
exposure time is unreasonable (way too long for example), the chamber nominal voltage is not set
correctly and can be adjusted in the AEC menu of Epsilon PC Tools. If the chamber signal does not
rise at all or nearly not at all but does rise when only the center field of the chamber is selected and
the exposure is repeated then the Field Polarity selection in PC Tools is incorrect.
This outcome tells us that either the Chamber is connected to the wrong connector (not the
connector configured in PC Tools) or the Chamber hardware configuration is incorrect.
8.3 PACKAGING AND SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS
If a unit must be shipped, clean it and install the protective cover on the H.V. receptacle before
packaging the assembly.
Use a robust cardboard box for packaging. The original shipment box (25” 20” 20”) contains
space for two protective Styrofoam pieces.

8.4 PARTS MANUAL
Controller & Power Supply Ass'y

(Generator Basket)
P/N 9910.00
Dummy Inverter
Jumper Board (0-3)
Electronic Documentation (on CD) P/N 9930.00
P/N 10019.xxx
X-ray Software
P/N 9809.01
Tube Chart Library Epsilon PC Tools

P/N 9814.xx P/N 9893.01 Client IO Software
P/N 9810.01
EPS Starter Board

Epsilon Operator Console P/N 9962.xx/11104.xxx
P/N 9777.xx
Fluoro PMT Board
P/N 9822.00
Console Board
Console Software P/N 9780.01
P/N 9811.xx Relay Expansion Board
Operator's Manual
P/N 9895.xx P/N 9932.00
Console Cable
Universal Chamber
P/N 10015.xxx
Interface P/N 11002.000
Photodiode Ion Chamber

Fluoro board Cable Discharge Unit
P/N 11030.000 P/N 10027.000
DAP Interface Option

2-Tube Option P/N 10028.000
P/N 10020.xxx
Optional parts
Standard parts
Figure 8.1 – Parts Identification for EPS 45-80 High-Voltage Generator.

9.0 INSTALLATION REPORT
9.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
9.1.1 Installation Information
Installer name
Site address
Date of Start of Installation / / [m/d/y]

Date of End of Installation / / [m/d/y]
Acceptance Tests Start / / [m/d/y]
End / / [m/d/y]
9.1.2 Generator Information
Generator Configuration EPS _________ ; Serial number __________
Optional Operator Console EPS _________ ; Serial number __________
Optional EPS Starter Board Low Speed High Speed

Stator Type _________
9.1.3 Generator Accessories
X-ray Tube Model _________ ; Serial number __________

Insert __________ : Serial number __________
Focal spots : ___ mm / ____ mm
H.V. Cables Model _________ ; Total Cable Length __________
AEC Sensor(s)
Photomultiplier Tube ( ) Photodiode ( ) Flat Panel Detector ( )
Manufacturer Model:
Ionization Chamber # ( ) : Connected to :

Manufacturer Model:
Ionization Chamber # ( ) : Connected to :

Manufacturer Model:

9.1.4 Measurement Devices
Multi meter
Manufacturer Model Serial N°:
Last Calibration Date / /
Oscilloscope
X-ray Dosimeter
Ion Chamber Probe

mAs meter
9.2 GENERATOR INSTALLATION
9.2.1 Inspection of Material upon Reception

Drop (N) Tell Indicator : Pass ( )
(Section 2.1.1)
Tip (N) Tell Indicator : Pass ( )
9.2.2 Input Line Voltage Configuration

Input Line Voltage & Frequency:
VAC, Three Phase, Hz
Line Configuration: Wye ( ) Delta ( ) (Section 2.4)
Line Impedance : Ohms
9.2.3 System Grounding Inspection

Ground Strap Installed ( )
(Section 2.7)
Ground Strap not Installed ( )

9. Installation Report
9.3 EPSILON CONFIGURATION
9.3.1 Generator Configuration

9.3.1.1 Workstation Configuration
WKS General Anode/Exp. Switch AEC Control Exp. Types

1 Name: _________ Speed _____ Source: ______ 3- pts
Tube R-X 1 2 Continuance _____ 2-pts
F/S S M F
Wks Enabled AEC-mA
Default Wks J12 Switch Fields L C R AEC-mAs
Fluoro Enabled J2 Switch AEC-zero
Default Fluoro Console PMT/Phd Gain: ______ Tomo
2 Name:__________ Speed _____ Source: ______ 3- pts
F/S S M F
Wks Enabled AEC-mA
3 Name:__________ Speed _____ Source: ______ 3- pts
F/S S M F
Wks Enabled AEC-mA
4 Name: __________ Speed _____ Source: ______ 3- pts
F/S S M F
Wks Enabled AEC-mA
F/S S M F
Wks Enabled AEC-mA
F/S S M F
Wks Enabled AEC-mA
CBCT

RAD Frame Rate Configuration Table

WKS Frame Rate selection per WKS Available Frame Rates
1 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4 Availability for all workstations:
FR5 FR6 FR7 FR1 = _________
2 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4
FR5 FR6 FR7 FR2 = _________
3 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4 FR3 = _________

FR5 FR6 FR7
FR4= _________
4 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4
FR5 FR6 FR7 FR5 = _________
5 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4 FR6 = _________

FR5 FR6 FR7
FR7 = _________
6 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4
FR5 FR6 FR7
9.3.1.2 Fluoro Configuration

General ABS Control Fluoro Factors
Anode Speed: __________ Source: ______ Min kV ______

SID Enabled Hi Fluoro Gain ______ Starting kV ______
Manual Mode Lo Fluoro Gain ______ Max kV ______
Alarm Timer: __________ Min kV ______
Starting mA______ (Cont.)
Starting mAs______ (Pulsed)
Pulsed Fluoro Controls Frame Rate Configuration
mA Display Trigger FR1 = ______ I/O bits b2 b1 b0

FR2 = ______ I/O bits b2 b1 b0
Average Source: __________ FR3 = ______ I/O bits b2 b1 b0
FR4 = ______ I/O bits b2 b1 b0
Peak Mode __________
FR5 = ______ I/O bits b2 b1 b0
FR6 = ______ I/O bits b2 b1 b0
FR7 = ______ I/O bits b2 b1 b0
Starting F.R = ______ Img Enh.

9.3.1.3 Input Configuration
Fluoro F. R. bit # 0
RAD F. R. bit # 0
RAD F. R. bit # 1
RAD F. R. bit # 2
Interlock Fluoro
Interlock Ready
Input Assignation
Interlock X-ray
F. Alarm Reset
Interlock Start
Interlock Idle
AEC Reset
AEC Lock
Workstation
Fluoro
1 2 3 4 5 6
J14- 2
J14- 3
J14- 4
J14- 5
J15A-2
J15A-3
J15A-4
J15A-5
J15B-2
J15B-3
+ J3A-2
+ J3A-3
+ J3A-4
+ J3A-5
& J3-1
& J3-2
+ : On Fluoro PMT Board P/N 9822.00
& : On Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro Board P/N 11030.000

9.3.1.4 Output Configuration
Heat Units Over n%

Fluoro F. R. bit #0
Fluoro F. R. bit #1
Fluoro F. R. bit #2
Fluoro High State

RAD F. R. bit #0
RAD F. R. bit #1
RAD F. R. bit #2
Fluoro Low State

Output Assignation
X-ray-On Alarm
Ready State
Fault State
Prep State
Start State
Run State
X-ray On
Idle State
Workstation
1 2 3 4 5 6 Fluoro
J14- 7
J14- 8
J14- 9
J15A-7
J15A- 8
J15B-1
J15B-5
J15B-6
+ J3A- 7
+ J3A-8
+ J3B-1
+ J3B-5
& J3-4
& J3-5
(LFB) J7- 1 & 2
(K1-K8)
+ : On Fluoro PMT Board P/N 9822.00
& : On Photodiode Ion Chamber Fluoro Board P/N 11030.000
9.3.2 Backup Data

Make sure to keep a backup of the configuration file of your generator once the System Settings Section is completed. Use the Epsilon PC
Tools Program to import the data from the operator console and from the generator to your PC.

9.4 INITIAL TURN-ON
9.4.1 Preliminary Generator Power-On Test
Pass ( ) Fail ( ) (Section 4.1)
9.4.2 Exposure Test Verification
System Not Calibrated : Exposure Test Verification [Section 5.1.2]

Exposure Measured values Tube loading range Test
50 kV ______ kV 45.5 ≤ kV ≤ 54.5 Pass ( ) Fail ( )
10 mA
200 ms _______ ms 189.8 ≤ ms ≤ 210.2 Pass ( ) Fail ( )
System Calibrated : Exposure Test Verification [Section 5.3.1]

Exposure Measured values Tube loading Range Test
100 kV ______ kV 93 ≤ kV ≤ 107 Pass ( ) Fail ( )
200 mA ______ mA 189.5 ≤ mA ≤ 210.5 Pass ( ) Fail ( )
100 ms _______ ms 94.8 ≤ ms ≤ 105.2 Pass ( ) Fail ( )
mAs Verification [Section 5.3.2]

2-point exposure 80 kV; 200 mAs AEC Exposure 80 kV; 200 mA
Displayed mAs : _____ mAs Displayed Backup mAs: _____ mAs

9.5 FIELD CALIBRATION
9.5.1 X-ray Tube Calibration
Completed ( ) Failed ( ) (Section 5.2)
9.5.2 Fluoroscopic Maximum Entrance Exposure Rate
Continuous Fluoro [Section 5.4]

Parameter Value
Maximum mA (Low Level) mA
Maximum mA (Normal Level) mA
Pulsed Fluoro [Section 5.4]
Parameter Value
Maximum mA (Low Level) mA
Pulsed width (Low Level) ms
Maximum mA (High Level) mA
Pulsed width (High Level) ms
9.5.3 ABS Mode Adjustment (Section 5.6)
ABS1 ABS2 Enabled ABS3 Enabled ABS4 Enabled

kV station % of dose kV station % of dose kV station % of dose kV station % of dose
125 kV _____ % 125 kV _____ % 125 kV _____ % 125 kV _____ %

____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ %
____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ %
____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ %
____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ % ____ kV _____ %

Control Device Fluoro Adjustment

D/A device Gain set to (1 thru 100%):
Low Fluoro : _________
High Fluoro : _________
Potentiometers Low Fluoro : R ____
High Fluoro : R ____
Ion Chamber # __ Low Fluoro : VNOM: ______
High Fluoro : VNOM: ______
Remote AEC Low Fluoro : VNOM: ______
High Fluoro : VNOM: ______
9.5.4 Image AEC/Brightness Devices
Control Device Workstations Adjustment

D/A device Gain set to (1 thru 100%):
W.S. _____ _________
W.S. _____ _________
W.S. _____ _________
Potentiometers W.S. ________ R ____
W.S. ________ R ____
W.S. ________ R ____
W.S. ________ R ____
Ion Chamber 1 W.S. ________
W.S. ________
W.S. ________
W.S. ________ (See Section 9.5.5)
W.S. ________
W.S. ________
W.S. ________
Remote AEC W.S. ________
W.S. ________

9.5.5 Field Selection/Integrator Reset (Section 5.7.1)
Control Voltage Volts

Integrator Low
Reset Polarity High
9.5.6 Film Screen Combinations/ AEC Feedback Gain (Section 5.7.2)
Ion Chamber 1 Ion Chamber 2 Ion Chamber 3

Slow Med. Fast Slow Med. Fast Fast Med. Fast
VNOM
kV Factor Factor Factor Factor Factor Factor Factor Factor Factor
42
46
50
55
60
66
73
81
90
102
117
133
9.6 USER ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Refer to Section 6.

989400G6 Epsilon Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

989400G6 Epsilon Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EPS 45-80 High-Voltage Generator

MANUAL P/N 9894.00.G6

Head Office European Authorized Representative

emd technologies Biocordis France S.A.A

ii Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

INTRODUCTION TO EPSILON TECHNICAL MANUAL

A.1 Intended Purpose

A.2 Application Note

For a complete user's guidance description, refer to the operator's manual.

Electronic Documentation: Refer also to the electronic documentation CD for

Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 iii

AEC : Automatic Exposure Control, in RAD mode

mAs : X-ray tube current by time product (mA x Time), in milliamperes-seconds

Operator: Person handling the generator.

Service representative: Person installing, maintaining and repairing the generator.

SPD : Source to Patient Distance

iv Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

Disregard of the procedures given below may cause serious or fatal

B.1 Electrical Safety

B.2 Radiation Safety

B.3 Class l Equipment

Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 v

Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions

vi Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity

Recommended separation distance

Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = [2,3] P , 800 MHz to 2,50 GHz

Field strengths fixed RD transmitter, as determined

Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 vii

Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity

viii Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

Recommended separation distances between portable

Cable Types Requirements

Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 ix

Alert service representative to hazards that

Alert service representative to the fact that X-rays will be produced

Hazards which could result in equipment or property damage

Alert service representative to a procedure important for optimal

x Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

INTRODUCTION TO EPSILON TECHNICAL MANUAL ...........................................................iii

1.0 INTRODUCTION TO EPSILON HF GENERATOR.............................................................. 1-1

2.0 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................... 2-1

Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 xi

2.2 INTERCONNECTION OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................2-4

3.0 INTERFACING ........................................................................................................................... 3-1

xii Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

3.5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS.......................................................................................................................................... 3-26

4.0 SYSTEM SETUP .......................................................................................................................... 4-1

Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 xiii

4.5 WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................... 4-20

5.0 FIELD-CALIBRATION .............................................................................................................. 5-1

xiv Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

5.7 ION CHAMBER SETUP & AEC CALIBRATION..................................................................................... 5-15

6.0 USER ACCEPTANCE TESTS .................................................................................................... 6-1

7.0 TROUBLESHOOTING & SERVICING.................................................................................... 7-1

Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 xv

7.5.2.4 Software Revision................................................................................................................................... 7-18

xvi Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6

7.7.3 Generator Calibration and Configuration Data .......................................................................................... 7-60

8.0 MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................ 8-1

9.0 INSTALLATION REPORT ........................................................................................................ 9-1

Technical Manual P/N 9894.00.G6 xvii

9.4 INITIAL TURN-ON ..............................................................................................................................................9-7